Home

Fuji Frenic Mini Compact Drives Instruction

1. Function code name For Motor 1 For Motor 2 Maximum Frequency F03 A01 Base Frequency F04 A02 Rated voltage at Base Frequency F05 A03 Maximum Output Voltage F06 A04 Torque Boost F09 A05 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor F10 A06 Select motor characteristics Overload detection level F11 A07 Thermal time constant F12 A08 DC Braking Braking starting frequency F20 A09 Braking level F21 A10 Braking time F22 A11 Starting Frequency F23 A12 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation F37 A13 Control Mode Selection F42 A14 Motor Parameters No of poles P02 A16 Rated current P03 A17 Auto tuning P04 A18 No load current P06 A20 R1 P07 A21 X Pos A22 Slip compensation gain for driving Pog A23 Slip compensation response time P10 A24 Slip compensation gain for braking P11 A25 Rated slip frequency P12 A26 Motor Selection P99 A39 Output Current Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor H80 A41 Cumulative Motor Run Time H94 A51 Startup Counter of Motor H44 A52 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 49 Motor 2 imposes functional restrictions on the following function codes Confirm the settings of those function codes before use Related function Functions Restrictions codes Non linear V f pattern Disabled Linear V f patte
2. Braking resistor Continuous braking Intermittent braking Power Fanges Resistance 100 braking torque Period 100 s or less supply Inverter type 9 Discharging Braking Allowable Dut voltage Type Qty capacity time average ED kWs s loss kW 2 7 FRN000402S 20 apg 7 20 100 50 50 0 075 3 Three FRN0006C2S 20 133 20 h 10C2S 20 7 4 phase ee paeeoe 40 55 3 0 110 FRNOO12C2S 20 50 0 FRN0020C2S 20 DB3 7 2C 33 140 75 0 185 2 7 FRN000202S40_ bapge4e 200 50 2 0 075 Three FRN0004C2S 40 i 133 20 h RN 2S 40 7 4 pe i elec DB2 2 4C 160 55 2 0 110 FRN0007C2S 40 50 7 FRNOO11C2S 40 DB3 7 4C 130 140 75 0 185 FRN0004C2S 70 2 37 Single 000402S DBO 75 2C 100 50 ae 0 075 altese FRNOOO6C2S 70 133 20 7 200 v FRNOO10C28 70 1 5 9g 46 55 3 0 110 FRNOO12C2S 70 50 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U E01 to E03 Terminal X1 to X3 Function E98 E99 Terminal FWD and REV Function Function codes E01 to E03 E98 and E99 allow you to assign commands to terminals X1 to X3 FWD and REV which are general purpose programmable digital input terminals These function codes may also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define how the inverter logic interprets either ON or O
3. ke a _ as Lay JL F1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 3 2 Arrangement of the control circuit terminals common to all FRENIC Mini models Y1 Y1E FMA C1 PLC X1 X2 X3 12 13 11 CM FWD REV CM Screw size M 2 Tightening torque 0 2 Nem Screw size M 2 5 Tightening torque 0 4 Nem Table 2 4 Con rol Circuit Terminals Ferrule terminal Bared wire Tomoe Screwdriver length Opening dimension in symbol Shape of tip Allowable wire size the terminal block meo Exa K E eae BES ee r Thickness of tip B 30A 30B Flat screwdriver AWG22 to AWG18 30C 0 6 x 3 5 mm 0 34 to 0 75 mm2 t0 7 mm 2 8 W x 1 7 H mm Other than Flat screwdriver AWG24 to AWG18 the above 0 5 x 2 4 mm 0 25 to 0 75 mm Sto Gin 1 7 WM AE mm Manufacturer of ferrule terminals WAGO Company of Japan Ltd Refer to Table 2 5 Table 2 5 Recommended Ferrule Terminals Type 216 000 Screw size Wire size With insulated collar Without insulated collar Short type Long type Short type Long type M2 AWG24 0 25 mm 321 301 151 131 AWG22 0 34 mm 322
4. io the rated capacity assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V d shall be reduced so that the continuous operating current is the rated current in parentheses or less if requency is set to 3 kHz or above or the ambient temperature exceeds 40 C o the estimated value to apply when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA inverter capacity x 10 when inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and the inverter is connected to the X 5 power supply o the value to apply when a DC reactor DCR is used o the average braking torque to apply when the motor running alone decelerates from 60 Hz with the being OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor e only for induction motor drive in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 3 8 2 Output frequency Common Specifications Item Maximum frequency Explanation 25 0 to 400 0 Hz variable Base frequency 25 0 to 400 0 Hz variable Starting frequency 0 1 to 60 0 Hz variable Carrier frequency Setting range 0 75 to 16 kHz variable Note To protect the inverter when the carrier frequency is 6 kHz or more the carrier frequency automatically lowers depending upon the ambient temperature or output current states The automatic lowering function can be disabled 1 Output frequency accuracy Stability e An
5. Note If the frequency fall rate is too high regeneration may take place at the moment the motor rotation matches the inverter output frequency causing an overvoltage trip On the contrary if the frequency fall rate is too low the time required for the output frequency to match the motor speed duration of current limiting action may be prolonged triggering the inverter overload prevention control F15 F16 Frequency Limiter High and Low H63 Low Limiter Mode selection F15 and F16 specify the upper and lower limits of the output frequency respectively H63 specifies the operation to be carried out when the output frequency drops below the low level specified by F16 as follows When H63 0 the output frequency will be held at the low level specified by F16 When H63 1 the inverter decelerates to stop the motor Note e When you change the frequency limiter High F15 in order to raise the reference frequency be sure to change the maximum frequency F03 A01 accordingly e Maintain the following relationship among the data for frequency control F15 gt F16 F15 gt F23 A12 and F15 gt F25 F03 A01 gt F16 where F23 A12 is of the starting frequency and F25 is of the stop frequency If you specify any wrong data for these function codes the inverter may not run the motor at the desired speed or cannot start it normally Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email i
6. L1 L enan i L2IN MCCB OE E nene RCD ELCB Power supply Note 1 MC Note 2 three phase i 200 to 240V H 50 60Hz or three phase 380 to 480V 50 60Hz Power supply to Po Pe T E Control circuit A potentiometer Voltage input Alarm output S oto 10 voc 1 for any faut F i Current input f i DBR Dynamic Brakin i g Resistor 4 to 20 mADC ts i DCR DC Reactor 1 RCD ELCB Residual current operated Analog meter AF a Protective Device i Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker MC Magnetic Contactor MCCB Molded Case Circuit Breaker 1 Transistor output Digiziinput RRR With a built in terminating resistor switch Note 1 Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the primary circuit of the inverter to protect wiring Do not use an MCCB or RCD ELCB whose capacity exceeds the recommended rated current Note 2 A magnetic contactor MC should if necessary be mounted independent of the MCCB or ELCB to cut off the power fed to the inverter Refer to page 9 2 for details MCs or solenoids that will be installed close to the inverter require surge absorbers to be connected in parallel to their coils Note 3 When connecting a DC reactor option remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P Note 4 The THR function can be used by assign
7. Data Setting 3 10 3 4 2 Checking changed function codes Data Checking 0 cee 3 13 3 4 3 Monitoring the running status Drive Monitoring ce eee 3 15 3 4 4 Checking I O signal status SPO Checking icc ciency 3 19 3 4 5 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information 3 23 3 4 6 Reading alarm information Alarm Information 3 5 Alarm mode Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR AN Test RUN eae i 4 1 1 Checking prior to powering on G 4 1 2 Powering ON and checking 4 1 3 Preparation before a test run Configuring function code data 4 1 4 Test run 4 2 Operation 4 2 1 Jogging Operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES n e e 5 1 5 1 Function Code Tables 5 2 Details of Function Codes 5 3 Notes in Driving PMSM 0c cee Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING ss 120111201 6 1 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED MONOT iios tEAM Naade ardid enina 6 2 1 Abnormal motor operation 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED MOtoro chats outed E eedes 6 10 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is Displayed see rat sik nets upset 6 24 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 7 1 7 1 Daily Inspection 7 1 7 2 Periodic Inspection 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts 3 7 3 1 Judgment on service life
8. Figure 7 1 Connection of Meters Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 7 7 5 Insulation Test Since the inverter has undergone an insulation test before shipment avoid making a Megger test at the customer s site If a Megger test is unavoidable for the main circuit observe the following instructions otherwise the inverter may be damaged A withstand voltage test may also damage the inverter if the test procedure is wrong When the withstand voltage test is necessary contact your Fuji Electric representative 1 Megger test of main circuit 1 Use a 500 VDC Megger and shut off the main power supply without fail during measurement 2 If the test voltage leaks to the control circuit due to the wiring disconnect all the wiring from the control circuit 3 Connect the main circuit terminals with a common line as shown in Figure 7 2 4 The Megger test must be limited to across the common line of the main circuit and the ground 5 Value of 5 MQ or more displayed on the Megger indicates a correct state The value is measured on an inverter alone Inverter LVR Las LOT OB P41 P NI Meggar Figure 7 2 Main Circuit Terminal Connection for Megger Test 2 Insulation test of control circuit Do not make a Megger test or withstand voltage test for the control circuit Use a high resistance range tester for the control circuit 1 Disconnect all
9. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 28 Motor characteristics F10 F10 selects the cooling mechanism of the motor shaft driven or separately powered cooling fan Data for F10 For a general purpose motor and Fuji standard permanent magnet synchronous motor with shaft driven cooling fan The cooling effect will decrease in low frequency operation For an inverter driven motor with separately powered cooling fan The cooling effect will be kept constant regardless of the output frequency The figure below shows operating characteristics of the electronic thermal overload protection when F10 1 The characteristic factors a1 through a3 as well as their corresponding switching frequencies f2 and f3 vary with the characteristics of the motor The tables below list the factors determined by the motor capacity P02 and the motor characteristics P99 Actual Gulput Current Continuous Overload Delection Level F11 i A 100 a3 2 fh Base frequency ad Even if the specified base frequency exceeds 60 Hz fb 60 Hz Output frequency fo H2 a a fz fa fb Cooling Characteristics of Motor with Shaft driven Cooling Fan Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 selection 0 or 4 Reference current Output frequency for Characteristic for setting the motor characteristic factor factor
10. shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN0011C2S 4E Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 1 Name of peripheral equipment Function and application Main peripheral equipment Molded case circuit breaker Earth leakage circuit breaker with overcurrent protection WARNING When connecting the inverter to the power supply add a recommended molded case circuit breaker and earth leakage circuit breaker in the path of power supply Do not use the devices with the rated current out of the recommenced range With overcurrent protection Fire could occur Select the MCCB or RCD ELCB with appropriate rated current and breaking capacity according to the power supply capacity Magnetic contactor MC An MC can be used at both the power input primary and output secondary sides of the inverter At each side the MC works as described below When inserted in the output circuit of the inverter an MC can also switch the motor drive power source between the inverter output and commercial power lines E At the power source primary side Insert an MC in the power source side of the inverter in order to 1 Forcibly cut off the inverter from the power source generally commercial factory power lines with the protecti
11. Cnote Do not mount the inverter upside down or horizontally Doing so will reduce the heat oa dissipation efficiency of the inverter and cause the overheat protection function to operate so the inverter will not run ACAUTION Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink This may result in a fire or accident 2 3 Wiring Follow the procedure below In the following description the inverter has already been installed 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the terminal block covers 1 Loosen the screw securing the control circuit terminal block cover 2 Insert your finger in the cutout near PULL in the bottom of the control circuit terminal block cover then pull the cover towards you 3 Hold both sides of the main circuit terminal block cover between thumb and forefinger and slide it towards you 4 After performing wiring mount the main circuit terminal block cover and control circuit terminal block cover in the reverse order of removal PANN 7 Control circuit terminal Control circuit terminal block cover i Main circuit terminal block cover block cover screw YW Figure 2 2 Removing the Terminal Block Covers Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 2 2 3 2 Terminal arrangement and screw specifications The figures below
12. ee 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit 7 5 Insulation Test 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 9 7 6 1 When making an inquiry 7 6 2 Product warranty Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series 8 1 3 Single phase 200 V class series 8 2 Common Specifications 8 3 Terminal Specifications 8 3 1 Terminal functions 8 3 2 Connection diagram in operation by external signal inputs 8 4 External Dimensions 8 4 1 Standard models 8 5 Protective Functions Chapter9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONG 9 1 Chapter 10 APPLICATION OF DC REACTORS DCRS8 ssssssssseeeeeeeeee 10 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 11 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS 11 1 11 1 Compliance with European Standards 11 2 Compliance with EMC Standards TZA Genaral ncn scvssestccesscossetsacsescuescvesers 11 2 2 Recommended installation procedure 11 2 3 Leakage current of EMC complaint filter Optional cece 11 4 11 3 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 11 5 11 3 1 General comment 0 0 0c ce 11 5 11 3 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation c000 11 6 11 4 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the 11 4 1 General 11 4 2 Points for consideration when using the FR
13. 1 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise Replace the keypad with another one and check whether a keypad communications error 2 no longer occurs gt Replace the keypad erratic CPU operation occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires and communications cable gt Implement noise control measures 15 amp amp Operation protection Problem Possible Causes 1 The 60 key was pressed when H96 1 or 3 An incorrect operation was attempted What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the Gros key was pressed when a run command had been entered from the input terminal or through the communications link gt If this was not intended check the setting of H96 The start check function was activated when H96 2o0r3 S Check if any of the following operations has been performed with a run command being entered Turning the power ON Resetting the alarm Switching the enable communications link LE operation gt Review the running sequence to avoid input of a run command when this error occurs If this was not intended check the setting of H96 Turn the run command OFF before resetting the alarm Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 19 16 7 Tuning error
14. ACAUTION Do not support the inverter by its terminal block cover during transportation Doing so could cause a drop of the inverter and injuries e Prevent lint paper fibers sawdust dust metallic chips or other foreign materials from getting into the inverter or from accumulating on the heat sink Otherwise a fire or an accident might result Do not install or operate an inverter that is damaged or lacking parts Doing so could cause fire an accident or injuries Do not get on a shipping box Do not stack shipping boxes higher than the indicated information printed on those boxes Doing so could cause injuries Wiring A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of power lines Use the devices within the recommended current range Use wires in the specified size When wiring the inverter to the power supply of 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Otherwise fire could occur Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause fire Be sure to connect the grounding wires without fail Otherwise electric shock or fire could occur Qualifie
15. FRN0010C2S 70 Single phase 200 V FRN0012C2S 70 DCR DC reactor Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN0011C2S 4E 1 Use crimp terminals covered with an insulated sheath or insulating tube Recommended wire sizes are for HIV IV PVC in the EU 2 Wire sizes are calculated on the basis of input RMS current under the condition that the power supply capacity and impedance are 500 kVA and 5 respectively 3 Insert the DC reactor DCR in either of the primary power input lines Refer to Chapter 10 for more details Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 5 2 3 4 Wiring precautions Follow the rules below when performing wiring for the inverter 1 Make sure that the source voltage is within the rated voltage range specified on the nameplate 2 Be sure to connect the power wires to the main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase voltage input or L1 L and L2 N for single phase voltage input of the inverter If the power wires are connected to other terminals the inverter will be damaged when the power is turned on 3 Always connect the grounding terminal to prevent electric shock fire or other disasters and to reduce electric noise
16. e Select application load with the function code For variable torque load or constant torque load Starting torque 1 150 or more Running at 1 Hz with slip compensation and auto torque boost active Start stop operation Keypad Start and stop with RUN and STOP keys standard keypad optional remote keypad External signals digital inputs Run forward and stop command Run reverse and stop command coast to stop command etc Link operation Operation through RS 485 built in as standard 1 Available only for induction motor drive 2 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 4 Item Explanation Frequency setting Control Keypad operation using the and keys with data protection function Also can be set with function code only via communication and be copied 2 Built in potentiometer Analog input 0 to 10 V DC 0 to 100 terminal 12 4 to 20 mA 0 to 100 0 to 20 mA 0 to 100 terminal C1 Multistep frequency Selectable from 16 different frequencies step 0 to 15 UP DOWN operation Frequency can be increased or decreased while the digital input signal is ON Link operation Frequency can be specified through RS 485 communications link Frequency setting switching Two types of frequency settings can be switched with an external
17. 4 Use crimp terminals covered with insulated sleeves for the main circuit terminal wiring to ensure a reliable connection 5 Keep the power supply wiring primary circuit and motor wiring secondary circuit of the main circuit and control circuit wiring as far away as possible from each other WARNINGA When wiring the inverter to the power source insert a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the path of power lines Use the devices within the related current range Use wires in the specified size Otherwise fire could occur e Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several inverters with motors Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s output secondary circuit Doing so could cause fire e Be sure to connect the grounding wires without fail Otherwise electric shock or fire could occur Qualified electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off e Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power su
18. 5 44 H codes data to be dis gt ia oo layed changed i High performance functions Play 5 Acodes Motor 2 parameters Lf J codes Application functions i5__ y codes Link functions __ Displays only function codes that have been Section 2 Data checking c EF changed from their factory defaults You may refer to 3 4 2 or change those function codes data SDA g Wed Displays the running information required for main Section pa fay ar 3 Drive monitoring oE tenance or test running 3 4 3 Displays external interface information i 4 I O checking Gia Play Section 3 4 4 us Maintenance crc Displays maintenance information including accu Section information JL mulated run time 3 45 a Displays the latest four alarm codes You may refer 3 6 ae informa BAL to the running information at the time when the alarm Seon occurred ti ni PE Allows you to read or write function code data as no k ey aes 1 Data copying lt well as verifying it To use this function a remote keypad option is required Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 8 Figure 3 3 illustrates the menu transition in Programming mode Power ON Programming mode Menu driven Data setting Running mode ra Menu 1 nn ae i Data sctling Mre ea 1 1 i 4 Drive monito
19. A center bar has appeared on the LED monitor What to Check and Suggested Measures To view other monitor items Check if E43 10 PID command or 12 PID feedback amount gt Set E43 to a value other than 10 or 12 To view a PID command or its feedback amount Check if the PID control is disabled J01 0 gt Set J01 to 1 Enable process control normal operation or 2 Enable process control inverse operation 2 When timer operation is To view other monitor items Check if E32 13 Timer disabled C21 0 timer set E43 to a value other than 13 is selected as a monitor y item E43 13 To view timer s Check if C21 0 Disable When timer operation gt Set C21 to 1 had been enabled C21 1 and timer had been selected as a monitor _ item by pressing the key you disabled timer operation C21 0 3 The remote keypad Prior to proceeding check that pressing the key does not Sea ta poorly change the display on the LED monitor Check continuity of the extension cable for the keypad used in remote operation gt Replace the extension cable Check the RJ 45 connector for damage gt Ensure the connector of the RJ 45 connector gt Replace the remote keypad option 2 ____ under bar appears Problem Although you pressed the furt key or entered a run forward command FWD or a run reverse command REV the motor did not start and an under bar _ _
20. Decrease the output frequency with the deceleration time currently specified Keep the current output frequency Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 50 The UP DOWN control is available in two modes one mode H61 0 in which the initial value of the reference frequency is fixed to 0 00 at the start of the UP DOWN control and the other mode H61 1 in which the reference frequency applied in the previous UP DOWN control applies as the initial value When H61 0 the reference frequency applied by the previous UP DOWN control has been cleared to 0 so at the next restart including powering on use the UP terminal command to accelerate the speed as needed When H61 1 the inverter internally holds the current output frequency set by the UP DOWN control and applies the held frequency at the next restart including powering on Note At the time of restart if an UP or DOWN terminal command is entered before the internal frequency reaches the output frequency saved in the memory the inverter saves the current output frequency into the memory and starts the UP DOWN control with the new frequency The previous frequency held will be overwritten by the current one Frequency 1 Frequency saved in internal memory e Output frequency Run command ON OFF ON UP terminal command fon Initial frequency for the UP
21. FD4 F03 HSG H52 F07 F08 E10 E11 Acceleration Time 1 Deceleration Time 1 Acceleration Time 2 Deceleration Time 2 F07 specifies the acceleration time the length of time the frequency increases from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency F08 specifies the deceleration time the length of time the frequency decreases from the maximum frequency down to 0 Hz Acc lime 1 Dec time 1 FO Maximum F08 frequency F03 Starting Stop frequency frequency 1 y F25 F23 Actual Actual acc time dec lime Note Selecting an S shaped pattern or curvilinear acceleration deceleration pattern with function code H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern makes the actual acceleration deceleration times longer than the specified ones Refer to the descriptions of function code H07 Specifying an improperly short acceleration deceleration time may activate the current limiter or anti regenerative control resulting in a longer acceleration deceleration time than the specified one Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 and acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 are switched by terminal command RT1 assigned to any of the digital input terminals with any of function codes E01 through E03 Tip Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 25 F09 Torque Boost 1 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 F37 specifies V f pat
22. Motor 2 Rated capacity 0 01 to 30 00 kW when A39 0 3 or 4 0 01 kW N Y1 See 0 01 to 30 00 HP when A39 1 0 01 HP Y2 Table A A17 Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 0 01 A N Y1 Rated Y2 value of Fuji standard motor Note Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination A Asia C China E Europe and U USA Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 16 A codes continued Incre Change Data Default Refer Code Name Data setting range ment Unit when copying setin to running Pying 9 page A18 Motor 2 Auto tuning 0 Disable N N 0 1 Tune when the motor stops R1 and X 2 Tune when the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X no load current slip freq A20 No load current 0 00 to 50 0 0 01 A N Y1 Rated Y2 value of Fuji istandard motor A21 R1 0 00 to 50 00 0 01 Y Y1 Rated Y2 value of Fuji istandard motor A22 X 0 00 to 50 00 0 01 Y Y1 Rated Y2 value of Fuji istandard motor A23 Slip compensation gain 0 0 to 200 0 0 1 YS Y 100 0 for driving A24 Slip compensation 0 01 to 10 00 0 01 s Y Y1 1 00 response time Y2 A25 Slip compensation gain 0 0 to 200 0 0 1 a Y 100 0 for braking A26 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 0 01 Hz N Y1 Rated Y2 value of Fuji i
23. The following tables list the function codes available for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters F codes Fundamental Functions Incre Change Data Default Rieter Code Name Data setting range ment Unit when copying settin to running pying g page F00 Data Protection 0 Disable both data protection and digital Y Y 0 5 21 reference protection 1 Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection 2 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection 3 Enable both data protection and digital reference protection F01 Frequency Command 1 0 UP DOWN keys on keypad N Y 4 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC 2 Current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 3 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 4 Built in potentiometer POT 7 Terminal command UP DOWN control Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 2 Incre Change Data Default Refer Code Name Data setting range ment Unit when copying settin to running Pying g page F02 Operation Method 0 RUN STOP keys on keypad Motor N Y 2 5 22 rotational direction specified by terminal command FWD REV 1 Terminal command FWD or REV 2 RUN STOP keys on keypad forward 3 RUN STOP keys on keypad reverse F03 Maximum Frequenc
24. When assigning the FWD or REV to terminal FWD or REV with F02 being set to 1 be sure to turn the target terminal OFF beforehand otherwise the motor may unintentionally rotate In addition to the run command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link are provided For details refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual 24A7 E 0023 F03 Maximum Frequency 1 F03 specifies the maximum frequency for motor 1 to limit the output frequency Specifying the maximum frequency exceeding the rating of the equipment driven by the inverter may cause damage or a dangerous situation Make sure that the maximum frequency setting matches the equipment rating AWARNING The inverter can easily accept high speed operation When changing the speed setting carefully check the specifications of motors or equipment beforehand Otherwise injuries could occur Tip Modifying F03 data to allow a higher reference frequency requires also changing F15 data specifying a frequency limiter high F04 Base Frequency 1 F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 H50 H51 Non linear V f Pattern 1 Frequency and Voltage H52 H53 Non linear V f Pattern 2 Frequency and Voltage These function codes specify the base frequency and the voltage at the base frequency essentially required for running the motor properly If combined with the related function cod
25. When the output current exceeds the Low current detection level plus 5 of the inverter rated current it goes OFF The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Output current Level 5 Level Timer o IDL ON E39 Coefficient for Constant Feeding Rate Time E50 Coefficient for Speed Indication E39 and E50 specify coefficients for determining the constant feeding rate time load shaft speed and line speed as well as for displaying the output status monitored Calculation expression Coefficient for speed indication E50 Frequency x Coefficient for constant feeding rate time E39 Constant feeding rate time min Load shaft speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Line speed Coefficient for speed indication E50 x Frequency Hz Where the frequency refers to the reference frequency to be applied for settings constant feeding rate time load shaft speed or line speed or to the output frequency before slip compensation to be applied for monitor If the constant feeding rate time is 999 9 min or more or the denominator of the right hand side is zero 0 999 9 appears E51 Display Coefficient for Input Watt hour Data Use this coefficient multiplication factor for displaying the input watt hour data 5_ 7 ina part of maintenance information on the keypad Input watt hour data Display coefficient E51 data x Input watt hour kWh Note Setting E51 data
26. appeared on the LED monitor Possible Causes 1 The DC link bus voltage was low What to Check and Suggested Measures FRE ay E Select 5_ 7 under Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode on the keypad then check the DC link bus voltage that should be 200 VDC or below for three phase 200 V class series and 400 VDC or below for three phase 400 V class series gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 24 3 appears Problem Parentheses _ appeared on the LED monitor during speed monitoring on the keypad Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The display data overflows the LED monitor Check whether the product of the output frequency and the display coefficient E50 exceeds 9999 gt Correct the setting of E50 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 25 Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION Perform daily and periodic inspection to avoid trouble and keep reliable operation of the inverter for a ong time When performing inspections follow the instructions given in this chapter WARNINGA Before proceeding to the maintenance and inspection turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make su
27. 1 Y N 0000 Maintenance 1 0001 to FFFF hex H80 Output Current 0 00 to 0 40 0 01 Y Y 0 20 Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 1 Note Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination A Asia C China E Europe and U USA 1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 14 H codes continued Code Name Data setting range Incre Unit ee Data Default sis ment running oP ing setting page H89 Electronic Thermal 0 Disable Y Bs 1 Overload Protection for 1 Enable Motor Data retention H91 PID Feedback Wire 0 0 Disable alarm detection 0 1 s Y Y 0 0 Break Detection 0 1 to 60 0 After the specified time cause Terminal C1 alarm H92 Continuity of P 0 000 to 10 000 times 999 0 001 times Y Y1 999 Running 1 Y2 H93 I 0 010 to 10 000 s 999 0 001 s Y Y1 999 Y2 H94 Cumulative Run Time of O to 9999 in units of 10 hours N N 5 76 Motor 1 H95 DC Braking 0 Slow Y 0 5 37 Braking response 1 Quick mode H96 STOP Key Priority Start Data STOP key priority Start check function Y Y ACE 0 Check Function Disable Disable U 3 1 Enable Disable 2 Disable Enable 3 Enable Enable H97 Clear Alarm Data 0 Disable Y N 0 5 74 1 Clear alarm data H98 Protection Maintenance B
28. 11 V f control for PMSM drive 1 5 41 Note Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination A Asia C China E Europe and U USA 1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later 2 When you make settings from tl display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 4 e keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can F codes continued r Incre 7 Change Data Default Reter Code Name Data setting range merit Unit when copying sattin to running Pying g page F43 Current Limiter 0 Disable No current limiter works Y bi 2 5 42 Mode selection 1 Enable at constant speed Disable during ACC DEC 2 Enable during ACC constant speed operation F44 Level 20 to 180 The data is interpreted as the 1 Y Y 160 rated output current of the inverter for 100 F50 Electronic Thermal 1 to 900 OFF Cancel 1 kWs Y Y1 OFF 5 43 Overload Protection for Y2 Braking Resistor Discharging capability F51 Allowable average loss 0 001 to 50 00 0 001 kW ve Y1 0 001 Y2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web
29. Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost Set the data of F37 or A13 to 1 A tuning operation involving motor rotation P04 or A18 2 was attempted while the brake was applied to the motor gt Specify the tuning that does not involve the motor rotation P04 or A18 1 gt Release the brake before tuning that involves the motor rotation P04 or A18 2 For details of tuning errors refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before a test run Configuring function code data Tuning errors Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 20 17 amp G RS 485 communications error Problem Acommunications error occurred during RS 485 communication Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Communications Compare the settings of the y codes y01 to y10 with those of the conditions of the inverter do not match that of the host equipment host equipment gt Correct any mismatch Even though no response error detection time y08 has been set communications is not performed within the specified cycle Check the host equipment gt Change the settings of host equipment software or disable the no response error detection y08 0 The host equipment e g PLCs and computers did not operate due to incorrect settings or software hardware defective Check the host equipment gt Remove the
30. REY PIA a FWO REV Pholacoupler ih i CM ICM a With a jumper applied to SINK b With a jumper applied to SOURCE Figure 2 8 Circuit Configuration Using a PLC Q For details about the jumper setting refer to Section 2 3 7 Setting up the jumper switches Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 15 Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Analog The monitor signal for analog DC voltage 0 to 10 VDC is output The monitor signal functions can be selected from the following with function code F31 Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency after slip compensation Output current Output voltage Input power PID feedback amount DC link bus voltage Calibration PID command SV PID output MV Analog output Input impedance of external device Min 5 kQ Analog Common terminal for analog input and output signals common This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM and Y1E Transistor 1 Various signals such as Inverter running Frequency arrival signal output and Motor overload early warning can be assigned to terminal Y1 by setting function code E20 Refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Details of Function Codes Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between Y1 and Y1E If the logic value for ON between
31. for driving P10 Slip compensation 0 01 to 10 00 0 01 s Y Y1 1 00 response time Y2 P11 Slip compensation gain 0 0 to 200 0 0 1 aa Y 100 0 for braking P12 Rated slip frequency 0 00 to 15 00 0 01 Hz N Y1 Rated 5 61 Y2 value of Fuji istandard motor P60 Permanent magnet 0 00 Disable PMSM 0 01 Q yY Y1 0 00 synchronous motor 1 0 01 to 50 00 Y2 Armature resistance P61 d axis inductance 0 00 Disable high efficiency control 0 01 mH Y Y1 0 00 0 01 to 500 0 Y2 P62 q axis inductance 0 00 Disable PMSM 0 01 mH Y Y1 0 00 0 01 to 500 0 Y2 1 The PMSM drive is available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 11 P codes continued Incre n Change Data Default Reten Code Name Data setting range ment Unit when copying settin to running pying g page P63 Permanent magnet 0 Disable PMSM 1 Vv N Y2 0 synchronous motor 1 80 to 240 for 200 V class series Induced voltage 160 to 500 for 400 V class series P74 Reference current at 10 to 200 1 Y Y1 80 starting Y2 P89 Control switching level 10 to 100 1 Y A 10 Y2 P90 Overcurrent protection 0 00 Disable 0 01 A Y Y1 0 00 level 0 01 to 100 0 Y2 P91 d axis compensation gain 0 0 to 25 0 999 Table value 0 1 Y Y1 999 under dampin
32. gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise DC link bus voltage has dropped below the undervoltage detection level What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Reset the alarm gt To restart the motor without treating this condition as an alarm set F14 to 4 or 5 depending on the load type 2 The power to the inverter was switched back to ON too soon when F14 1 Check if the power to the inverter was switched back to ON while the control power was still alive Check whether the LEDs on the keypad light gt Switch the power ON again after all LEDs on the keypad go off 3 The power supply voltage did not reach the inverter s specification range Measure the input voltage gt Increase the voltage to within the specified range S Peripheral equipment for the power circuit malfunctioned or the connection was incorrect Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Measure the input voltage to find which peripheral equipment malfunctioned or which connection is incorrect gt Replace any faulty peripheral equipment or correct any incorrect connections 6 12 Possible Causes 5 Any other load s connected to the same power su
33. in Section 3 4 4 Checking I O signal status for details No of consecutive occurrences This is the number of times the same alarm occurs consecu tively Overlapping alarm 1 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 1 7 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Overlapping alarm 2 Simultaneously occurring alarm codes 2 7 is displayed if no alarms have occurred Terminal I O signal status under commu nication control displayed with the ON OFF of LED seg ments Terminal input signal status under commu nication control in hexadecimal for mat Terminal output signal status under commu nication control in hexadecimal for mat Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals under RS 485 communication control Refer to Displaying control VO signal terminals under communication control in Sec tion 3 4 4 Checking I O signal status for details Error sub code Secondary error code for the alarm Running status 2 Shows the running status 2 in hexadecimal format For details see the next page Running status 3 Shows the running status 3 in hexadecimal format For details see the next page C Note When the same alarm occurs repeatedly in succession the alarm information for the first occurrence is retained and the information for the subsequent occurrences is discarded Only the number of consecutive occurrences will be updated Phon
34. thermal time constant Imax f2 f3 al a2 a3 Nominal Thermal time applied motor constant t kW Factory default 0 1 to 0 75 85 100 1 5 to 4 0 85 100 5 5 to 11 6 Hz 95 100 Allowable continuous current 7 Hz 85 100 x 150 5 Hz 100 100 Base Base frequency frequency 85 90 x 33 x 33 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 29 Nominal Applied Motor and Characteristic Factors when P99 Motor 1 Selection 1 or 3 Reference current Output frequency for Characteristic for setting the motor characteristic factor factor thermal time constant Imax f2 f3 al a2 a3 Nominal Thermal time applied motor constant t kW Factory default Base 0 1 to 22 frequency Allowable Base x 33 continuous current frequency x 150 x 33 Base frequency x 83 When F10 2 the cooling effect is not decreased by the output frequency so that the overload detection level is a constant value without reduction F11 m Overload detection level F11 F11 specifies the detection level in amperes at which the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated In general set F11 to the rated current of motor when driven at the base frequency i e 1 0 to 1 1 multiple of the rated current of motor 1 P03 To disable the electronic thermal overload protection
35. use a three phase motor as the inverter provides three phase output Environ mental conditions Installation loca tion The heat sink and braking resistor of the inverter may be come hot under certain operating conditions so install the inverter on nonflammable material such as metal Ensure that the installation location meets the environmental conditions specified in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Combina tion with peripheral devices Installing an MCCB or RCD ELCB Install a recommended molded case circuit breaker MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection in the input primary circuit of the inverter to protect the wiring Do not use the circuit breaker capacity exceeding the recommended rated current Installing an MC in the secondary circuit If a magnetic contactor MC is mounted in the inverter s secondary circuit for switching the motor to commercial power or for any other purpose ensure that both the inverter and the motor are completely stopped before you turn the MC on or off Do not connect a magnet contactor united with a surge killer to the inverter s secondary circuit Installing an MC in the primary circuit Do not turn the magnetic contactor MC in the input primary circuit on or off more than once an hour as an inverter failure may result If frequent starts or stops are
36. 0 80 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 67 200 V class series for USA version FRN C2S 2U FRN__ _ _C2S 7U 230 V 60 Hz rated voltage base frequency Fuji standard 8 series Nominal Rated No load R X Rated slip applied current current frequency motor A A Hz PO2 A16 kW P03 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 42 0 38 11 45 9 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 63 0 53 10 44 10 21 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 21 1 02 10 48 10 46 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 11 1 59 8 14 10 90 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 27 2 20 6 85 8 50 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 5 44 2 88 5 08 8 69 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 8 24 4 65 5 05 8 54 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 13 40 7 35 4 50 8 74 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 55 20 06 10 54 4 09 11 09 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 75 25 72 11 98 3 47 11 32 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 37 21 16 96 2 91 11 63 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 48 50 19 17 2 49 12 55 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 58 90 20 51 2 23 12 68 0 87 22 00 to 29 99 22 68 57 24 05 2 06 12 23 0 90 30 00 30 94 36 37 28 2 02 11 47 0 80 Motor capacity kW 400 V class series for USA version FRN C2S 4U 460 V 60 Hz rated voltage base frequency Fuji standard 8 series Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load R X Rated slip KW applied current current frequency mo
37. 1 00 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 69 H04 HO5 Auto reset Times and Reset interval H04 and H05 specify the auto reset function that makes the inverter automatically attempt to reset the tripped state and restart without issuing an alarm for any faults even if any protective function subject to reset is activated and the inverter enters the forced to stop state tripped state If the protective function works in excess of the times specified by H04 the inverter will issue an alarm for any faults and not attempt to auto reset the tripped state Listed below are the recoverable alarm statuses to be retried Alarm status LED monitor displays Alarm status LED monitor displays y Overcurrent protection fi cor 5 Motor overheated HY Overvoltage protection Z Lii or 4 5 Motor overloaded Hh fore Heat sink overheated OH i Inverter overloaded LI Braking resistor mL overheated Se E Number of reset times H04 H04 specifies the number of reset times for the inverter to automatically attempt to escape from the tripped state When H04 0 the auto reset function will not be activated A WARNING If the auto reset function has been specified the inverter may automatically restart and run the motor stopped due to a trip fault d
38. 1 30 1 38 1 21 0 20 bien 0 4 RN0004C2S 70 Tet 2 10 2 30 2 36 2 11 0 40 200 V 0 75 RN0006C2S 70 6 8 3 29 3 60 3 58 3 27 0 75 1 5 RN0010C2S 70 6 8 5 56 6 10 5 77 5 44 1 50 2 2 RN0012C2S 70 6 8 8 39 9 20 8 80 8 24 2 20 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN0011C2S 4E Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 20 5 2 Details of Function Codes This section provides the details of the function codes frequently used for the FRENIC Mini series of inverters For details about the function codes given below and other function codes not given below refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual 24A7 E 0023 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES FOO Data Protection FOO specifies whether to protect function code data except F00 and digital reference data such as frequency command PID command and timer operation from accidentally getting changed by pressing the A V keys Data for FOO Function Disable both data protection and digital reference protection allowing you to change both function code data and digital reference data with the N V keys Enable data protection and disable digital reference protection allowing you to change digital reference data with the V keys But you cannot change funct
39. 1 frequency command 2 multistep frequency command or other frequency commands This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added to Auxiliary frequency all frequency commands including frequency command command 2 1 frequency command 2 and multistep frequency commands This input includes temperature pressure or other PID command 1 commands to apply under the PID control Function code J02 should be also configured This input includes the feedback of the temperature or pressure under the PID control Not available for E60 PID feedback amount vote If the built in potentiometer and different terminals have been set up to have the same data the operation priority is given in the following order E60 gt E61 gt E62 Selecting the UP DOWN control F01 C30 7 ignores auxiliary frequency command 1 and 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 59 C21 Timer Operation C21 enables or disables a timer operation that is triggered by a run command and continues for the timer count previously specified with the M keys The operating procedure for the timer operation is given below Data for C21 Function 0 Disable timer operation 1 Enable timer operation Pressing the ee key during timer countdown quits the timer operation Even if C21 1 setting the timer to 0 no longer starts the timer operation with
40. 302 152 132 M2 or M2 5 AWG20 0 50 mm 221 201 121 101 AWG18 0 75 mm 222 202 122 102 The length of bared wires to be inserted into ferrule terminals is 5 0 mm or 8 0 mm for the short or long type respectively The following crimping tool is recommended Variocrimp 4 Part No 206 204 2 3 3 Recommended wire sizes Table 2 6 lists the recommended wire sizes The recommended wire sizes for the main circuit terminals for an ambient temperature of 50 C are indicated for two types of wire HIV single wire for the maximum allowable temperature 75 C before a slash and IV single wire for 60 C after a slash Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 4 Table 2 6 Recommended Wire Sizes i Recommended wire size mm Nomi Main circuit nal Main circuit power input applied Inverter type L1 R L2 S L3 T motor l L1 L L2 N Inverter Braking Control kW Groundin output resistor circuit Te D U V W P DB w DCR w o DCR Power supply voltage FRN0001C2S 20 FRN0002C2S 20 FRN0004C2S 20 FRN0006C2S 20 FRN0010C2S 20 FRN0012C2S 20 gt Q oO N oO fz wo g D oO e FRNOO20C2S 20 FRN0002C2S 40 FRN0004C2S 40 FRN0005C2S 40 FRN0007C2S 40 Three phase 400 V FRN0011C2S 40 FRN0001C2S 70 FRN0002C2S 70 FRN0004C2S 70 FRN0006C2S 70
41. 55 21 15 44 2 84 16 10 0 80 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 65 200 V class series for China version FRN C2S 7C 200 V 50 Hz rated voltage base frequency Fuji standard 8 series Nominal Rated No load R X Rated slip applied current current frequency motor A A Hz Motor capacity kW PO2 A16 kW PO3 A17 P06 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 30 1 06 12 95 12 92 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 30 1 66 10 20 13 66 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 60 2 30 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 6 10 3 01 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 9 20 4 85 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 15 00 7 67 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 22 50 11 00 5 28 14 31 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 29 00 12 50 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 42 00 17 70 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 55 00 20 00 3 25 16 37 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 67 00 21 40 2 92 16 58 0 87 22 00 to 29 99 22 78 00 25 10 2 70 16 00 0 90 30 00 30 107 0 38 90 2 64 14 96 0 80 400 V class series for China version FRN C2S 4C 380 V 50 Hz rated voltage base frequency Fuji standard 8 series Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load R X Rated slip kW applied current curre
42. 8 94 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 5 56 2 76 5 43 9 29 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 8 39 4 45 5 37 9 09 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 13 67 7 03 4 80 9 32 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 20 50 10 08 4 37 11 85 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 26 41 11 46 3 73 12 15 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 38 24 16 23 3 13 12 49 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 50 05 18 33 2 69 13 54 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 60 96 19 62 2 42 13 71 0 87 22 00 to 29 99 22 70 97 23 01 2 23 13 24 0 90 30 00 30 97 38 35 66 2 18 12 38 0 80 400 V class series for Asia version FRN C2S 4A 380 V 60 Hz rated voltage base frequency Fuji standard 8 series Motor capacity Nominal Anke Ne eed R X Rated slip kW applied current current 66 h frequency motor A A i Hz P02 A16 kw P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 P08 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 19 0 16 12 54 10 68 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 31 0 21 12 08 11 81 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 58 0 42 12 16 12 14 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 07 0 66 9 99 13 38 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 72 0 91 8 72 10 82 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 10 1 20 6 89 11 80 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 54 1 92 6 73 11 40 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 7 43 3 04 6 04 11 73 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 49 4 35 5 55 15 05 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 75 14 63 4 95 4 78 15 59 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 21 23 7 01 4 02 16 06 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 28 11 7 92 3 50 17 61 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 35 04 8 47 3 16 17 97 0 87 22 00 to 29 99 22 40 11 9 98 2 92 17 32 0 90 30 00 30
43. 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 63 H03 Data Initialization HO3 initializes the current function code data to the factory defaults or initializes the motor parameters To change the H03 data it is necessary to press the E N keys or E keys simultaneous keying Data for H03 Function Disable initialization Settings manually made by the user will be retained Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults Initialize motor 1 parameters in accordance with P02 Rated capacity and P99 Motor 1 selection Function codes subject to initialization P03 PO6 to P12 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages Initialize motor 2 parameters in accordance with A16 Rated capacity and A39 Motor 2 selection Function codes subject to initialization A17 A20 to A26 and constants for internal control These function codes will be initialized to the values listed in tables on the following pages e To initialize the motor parameters set the related function codes using the following steps 1 PO2 A16 Set the rated capacity of the motor to be used in kW Motor Rated capacity 2 P99 A39 Select the characteristics of the motor Motor Selection 3 H03 Data Initialization Initialize the motor parameters H03 2 or 3 4 P03 A17 Set the
44. Alarm code Indicates the cause of the alarm condition that has triggered the protective function For details refer to Chapter 8 Section 8 5 Protective Functions Figure 3 1 shows the status transition of the inverter between these three operation modes Power ON Setting of function codes Run Stop of motor Monitor of cunning status Manitor of running status VG signal states and maintenance info OS n r x a r f 4 n y p EB f 2 co E f t i ki f Occurrence KA a 7 B ofanalanm gt 1 TEE a Cd y n wW n so Press this key ifan i alarm has occured Display of alarm status Figure 3 1 Status Transition between Operation Modes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 2 Figure 3 2 illustrates the transition of the LED monitor screen during the Running mode the transi tion between menu items in the Programming mode and the transition between alarm codes at different occurrences in the Alarm mode Power ON Running mode Programming mode Monitor of running status Menu driven display PID feedback value eo 303 Menu 6 Menu 7 Input watt hour kWh Eg 005 w Alarm mode i Display of alarm status fA Occurence of aO an alarm E 2 Press these keys if an alarm has occured 2nd last alarm code Eg j 3rd last alarm code Eg 1 In speed monitor
45. Current detected 2 1041 Low current detected 1043 Under PID control PID CTL Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control 1049 Switched to motor 2 swm2 1056 Motor overheat detected by thermistor PTC THM 1057 Brake signal BRKS 1059 Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF 1084 Maintenance timer MNT 1087 Frequency arrival detected FARFDT 1099 Alarm output for any alarm ALM Functions assigned 1044 PID STP Inverter running RUN Function code data 0 This output signal tells the external equipment that the inverter is running at a starting frequency or higher It comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the starting frequency and it goes OFF when it is less than the stop frequency It is also OFF when the DC braking is in operation If this signal is assigned in negative logic Active OFF it can be used as a signal indicating Inverter being stopped E Frequency arrival signal FAR Function code data 1 This output signal comes ON when the difference between the output frequency and reference frequency comes within the frequency arrival hysteresis width specified by E30 Refer to the description of E30 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 53 E Frequency detected FDT Function code data 2 This output signal comes ON when the output frequency exceeds the frequ
46. DOWN control when the frequency command source is switched When the frequency command source is switched to the UP DOWN control from other sources the initial frequency for the UP DOWN control is as listed below a Frequency command Switching command Initial frequency for UP DOWN contro Source H61 0 H61 1 Reference frequency given by the frequency command source used just before switching Cancel PID control Reference frequency given by PID control Hz PID PID controller output Select multistep Reference Multistep frequency frequency SS1 SS2 frequency given Reference SS4 and SS8 by the frequency frequency at the command source time of previous fate i Enable communications i used just before UP DOWN control Communications link link via RS 485 LE switching Other than UP DOWN Select frequency F01 C30 command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 PID conditioner Note TO enable the UP and DOWN terminal commands you need to set frequency command 1 F01 or frequency command 2 C30 to 7 beforehand Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 51 Enable communications link via RS 485 LE Function code data 24 Turning this terminal command ON assigns priorities to frequency commands or run commands received via the RS 485 communications link H30 No LE assignment is functionally equivalent to the LE being ON Refer to the description of
47. F01 F05 E52 Basic key operation The basic key operation is the same as for Data setting CTi To check function codes in Menu 2 Data checking it is necessary to set function code E52 to 1 Function code data check mode or 2 Full menu mode For details refer to Limiting menus to be displayed on page 3 9 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 14 3 4 3 Monitoring the running status Drive Monitoring Menu 3 Drive monitoring is used to check the running status during maintenance and test running The display items for Drive monitoring are listed in Table 3 8 Figure 3 7 shows the status transition diagram for Drive monitoring Power ON ae w mode Programming ee mode e List of monitoring iterns Running status info Sud 1 1 TE Output frequency Fr use before slip i compensation g ______ Output frequency oi d Coao after slip compensation 30e 3 03 Ja z r doia p G0 PID feedback amount Figure 3 7 Drive Monitoring Status Transition Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 15 Basic key operation Before checking the running status on the drive monitor set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode 1 When the inverter is powered on it automatically enters Running mode In that mode
48. F05 P02 P03 P60 P61 P62 1 Mismatch with the characteristics of the motor P63 agree with the motor parameters gt Set the motor parameters to those function codes 2 Starting torque was insufficient Check the settings of the acceleration time F07 E10 and the reference current at starting P74 gt Change the acceleration time to match the load gt Increase the reference current value at starting gt Set the holding time of the starting frequency 1 F24 gt Set the S curve H07 1 or 2 gt Increase the control switching level P89 3 Load is light Check the setting of the reference current at starting P74 gt Decrease the reference current value at starting Set it to 80 or lower when running a motor alone in a test run etc 4 Control system not stabilized Check the settings of the armature resistance of PMSM P60 and the V f damping control compensation gain P91 P92 gt Adjust the armature resistance of the motor gt Adjust the settings of the compensation gain P91 P92 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 23 6 4 If an Abnormal Pattern Appears on the LED Monitor while No Alarm Code is 1 Problem Displayed Possible Causes 1 When the PID command and its feedback amount are selected as a monitor item the PID control is disabled center bar appears
49. FRN0004C2S 40 DCR4 0 75 Single phase 200 V FRN0001C2S 70 DCR2 0 2 FRN0002C2S 70 DCR2 0 4 FRN0004C2S 70 DCR2 0 75 FRN0006C2S 70 DCR2 1 5 Inverter types marked with v in the table above are compliant with the EN61000 3 2 A14 so they may be connected to public low voltage power supply unconditionally Conditions apply when connecting models marked with If you want to connect them to public low voltage power supply you need to obtain permission from the local electric power supplier In general you will need to provide the supplier with the harmonics current data of the inverter To obtain the data contact your Fuji Electric representative Note 1 A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U 2 When supplying three phase 200 VAC power stepped down from a three phase 400 VAC power line using a transformer the level of harmonic flow from the 400 VAC line will be regulated 11 4 Compliance with the Low Voltage Directive in the EU 11 4 1 General General purpose inverters are regulated by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Fuji Electric has obtained the proper certification for the Low Voltage Directive from the official inspection agency Fuji Electric states that all our inverters with CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 11 4 2 Points for consid
50. HLD ON ON m Coast to a stop BX Function code data 7 Turning this terminal command ON immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the motor coasts to a stop without issuing any alarms m Reset alarm RST Function code data 8 Turning this terminal command ON clears the ALM state alarm output for any fault Turning it OFF erases the alarm display and clears the alarm hold state When you turn the RST command ON keep it ON for 10 ms or more This command should be kept OFF for the normal inverter operation An alarm occurrence 1 Inverter Turning alarm display on and No alarm displayed running status holding alarm status Stop and ready to run Alarm output ALM a ON OFF io Min 10ms Reset alarm RST OFF ON OFF m Enable external alarm trip THR Function code data 9 Turning this terminal command OFF immediately shuts down the inverter output so that the HIT motor coasts to a stop displays the alarm Zi4ic and outputs the alarm relay for any fault ALM The THR command is self held and is reset when an alarm reset takes place Use this alarm trip command from external equipment when you have to immediately shut down the inverter output in the event of an abnormal situation ina peripheral equipment Tip Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 47 m Ready for jogging JOG Function code data 10 This
51. If Function code F02 Pressing the U key is set to rotates the motor in the forward direction in the reverse direction Note The rotation direction of IEC compliant motors is op posite to the one shown here For the details of operation with function code F02 set to 0 or 1 refer to Chapter 5 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 7 3 4 Programming mode Programming mode provides you with these functions setting and checking function code data monitoring maintenance information and checking input output I O signal status The functions can be easily selected with the menu driven system Table 3 5 lists menus available in Programming mode The leftmost digit numerals of each letter string indicates the corresponding menu number and the remaining three digits indicate the menu contents When the inverter enters Programming mode from the second time on the menu that was selected last in Programming mode will be displayed Table 3 5 Menus Available in Programming Mode LED Menu Menu monitor Main functions pes shows i 1E F codes Fundamental functions IE E codes Extension terminal functions In C codes fies Control functions of frequency Selecting each of ia__ P codes these function esain 1 Data setting Motor 1 parameters codes enables its
52. Leakage Current of EMC compliant Filter optional Leak A 1 2 Inverter type Filter type eakage current mA FRNO 1C2S 2J FRNO0O01C2S 201 FRNO 2C2S 2J FRN0002C25 20 FS5956 6 46 FRNO 4C2S 2J FRN0004C2S 201 EFL 0 75E11 2 FRNO 75C28 2J FRN0006C2S 20 FRN1 5C2S 2J FRNOO10C2S 20 FS5956 26 47 FRN2 2028 2 FRNOO12C2S 201 EFL 4 0E11 2 FRN3 7C28 2J FRN0020C2S 20 FRNO 4C2S 4J FRN0002C2S 40 FS20229 3 5 07 FRN1 5C2S 4J FRN0005C2S 40 FS20229 9 07 1 FRN2 2C2S 4J FRN0007C2S 40 Fs20209 9 07 paca oo 9 FRN3 7C2S 4J FRNOO11C2S 40 2 13 07 FRNO 1C2S 7J FRNOO01C2S 70 FRNO 2C2S 7J FRNOO02C2S 70 F 2 10 07 FRNO 4C2S 7J FRNOO04C2S 70 38092 10 0 FRNO 75C2S 7J FRNOOO6C2S 70 FRN1 5C2S 7J FRNO010C2S 70 FS20159 17 07 FRN2 2C2S 7J FRNO012C2S 70 FS20159 25 07 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U 1 The values are calculated assuming the power supplies of three phase 240 V 50 Hz three phase 400 V 50 Hz and single phase 230 V 50 Hz 2 The worst condition includes a phase loss in the supply line Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 4 11 3 Harmonic Component Regulation in the EU 11 3 1 General comments When you use general purpose industrial inverters in the EU the harmonics emitted from the inverter to power lines are str
53. Mini User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect data of function code e g cancel higher priority run commands etc The acceleration time was too long or too short Check the data of function codes F07 and E10 Acceleration time gt Change the acceleration time to match the load 6 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load Adjust the dumper of the fan or the valve of the pump In winter the load tends to increase Check whether any mechanical brake is activated gt Release the mechanical brake 7 Mismatch with the characteristics of the motor If auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is under way check whether the data of P02 P03 P06 P07 and P08 A16 A17 A20 A21 and A22 agrees with the parameters of the motor gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used 8 The current limiting operation did not increase the output frequency Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 and check the setting of F44 Current limiter Level gt Correct the data of F44 Or if the current limiter operation is not needed set F43 to 0 disable Decrease the value of torque boost F09 then run the motor again and check if the speed increases gt Adjust the value of the torque boost F09 Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 to ensure that the V f pattern setti
54. Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 10 1 Chapter 11 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS 11 1 Compliance with European Standards The CE marking on Fuji products indicates that they comply with the essential requirements of the Electromagnetic Compatibility EMC Directive 2004 108 EC issued by the Council of the European Communities and Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Inverters that bear a CE marking are compliant with the Low Voltage Directive The products comply with the following standards Low Voltage Directive EN61800 5 1 2007 EMC Directives EN61800 3 2004 A1 2012 Immunity Second environment Industrial Emission Category C2 Applicable only when an optional EMC compliant filter is attached CAUTION The FRENIC Mini series of inverters are categorized as a restricted sales distribution class of the EN61800 3 When you use these products with any home appliances or office equipment you may need to take appropriate countermeasures to reduce or eliminate any noise emitted from these products Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 1 11 2 Compliance with EMC Standards 11 2 1 General The CE marking on inverters does not ensure that the entire equipment including our CE marked products is compliant with the EMC Directive Therefore CE marking for the equipment shall be the responsibility of the equ
55. Problem Auto tuning failed Possible Causes 1 Aphase was missing There was a phase loss in the connection between the inverter and the motor What to Check and Suggested Measures gt Properly connect the motor to the inverter V f or the rated current of the motor was not properly set BS Check whether the data of function codes matches the motor specifications Motor 1 F04 F05 H50 through H53 P02 and P03 Motor 2 A02 A03 A16 and A17 S The wiring length between the inverter and the motor was too long Check whether the wiring length between the inverter and the motor exceeds 50 m gt Review and if necessary change the layout of the inverter and the motor to shorten the connection wire Alternatively minimize the wiring length without changing the layout gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost Set the data of F37 or A13 to 1 s The rated capacity of the motor was significantly different from that of the inverter Check whether the rated capacity of the motor is three or more ranks lower or two or more ranks higher than that of the inverter gt Replace the inverter with one with an appropriate capacity gt Manually specify the values for the motor parameters P06 P07 and P08 or A20 A21 and A22 gt Disable both auto tuning and auto torque boost Set the data of F37 or A13 to 1 G The motor is a special type such as a high speed motor gt
56. RJ 45 connector do not use those pins 4 For the location of the RJ 45 connector refer to Figure 2 11 Locations of Jumper Switches and RJ 45 Connector Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 17 Route the wiring of the control terminals as far from the wiring of the main circuit as possible Otherwise electric noise may cause malfunctions Fix the control circuit wires inside the inverter to keep them away from the live parts of the main circuit such as the terminal block of the main circuit The pin assignment of the RJ 45 connector on the FRENIC Mini series is different from that of the RJ 45 connector on the FVR E11S series keypad Do not connect them with each other doing so may cause a short circuiting or collision of signal lines resulting in a broken inverter Cnote 2 3 7 Setting up the jumper switches WARNINGA Before changing the jumper switches turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below An electric shock may result if this warning is not heeded as there may be some residual electric charge in the DC link bus capacitor even after the power has been turned OFF Switching the jumper switches sh
57. SOURCE swi 0 O Factory default for Factory default for FRN____C2S _A C U FRN____C2S _E SW3 Factory default for all inverter types RJ 45 connector Figure 2 11 Locations of Jumper Switches and RJ 45 Connector Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 19 2 3 8 Cautions relating to harmonic component noise and leakage current 1 Harmonic component Input current to an inverter includes a harmonic component that may affect other motors and phase advancing capacitors on the same power supply line If the harmonic component causes any problems connect a DC reactor option to the inverter In some cases it is necessary to insert a reactor in series with the phase advancing capacitors 2 Noise If noise generated from the inverter affects other devices or that generated from peripheral equipment causes the inverter to malfunction follow the basic measures outlined below 1 If noise generated from the inverter affects the other devices through power wires or grounding wires Isolate the grounded metal frames of the inverter from those of the other devices Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires Isolate the power system of the other devises from that of the inverter with an insulated transformer 2 If induction or radio noise generated from the inverter affects other devices through power wires or grounding wi
58. Set the frequency component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern Setting 0 0 to H50 or H52 disables the non linear V f pattern operation m Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Voltage H51 and H53 Sets the voltage component at an arbitrary point of the non linear V f pattern m Maximum Output Voltage F06 Set the voltage for the maximum frequency 1 F03 Cote If F05 Rated Voltage at Base Frequency 1 is set to 0 settings of H50 through ole H53 and F06 do not take effect When the non linear point is below the base frequency the linear V f pattern applies when it is above the output voltage is kept constant When the auto torque boost F37 is enabled the non linear V f pattern takes no effect Examples E Normal linear V f pattern Output vohaga Vy Maximum eulput volage 1 FOG Rated valtage at base frequency 1 FOS Output frequency Az Base Maximum frequency 1 Frequency 1 F04 FOS Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 24 E V f pattern with two non linear points Duipui vohaga Vy Maximum output yollage 1 F06 Rated vollage lt base frequaney 4 pee sess me we no FOS Non linear WF paltern 2 volage H53 Non linear Vif pattern 1 Voltage H51 i Quiput frequency Hz Non hnear Non linear Base Maximum Vit pattern 1 Wif pattern 2 frequency 1 Tequency 1 Frequency Fraquency
59. The LED displays the alarm Possible Causes 1 Data of the function code H45 has been set to 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net What to Check and Suggested Measures This setting makes the inverter issue a mock alarm Use this to check out the sequence related to an alarm occurrence gt To escape from this alarm state press the S key 6 22 20 LoF PID feedback wire break Problem The PID feedback wire is broken Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The PID feedback Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected signal wire is broken correctly gt Check whether the PID feedback signal wires are connected correctly Or tighten up the related terminal screws gt Check whether any contact part bites the wire sheath 2 PID feedback related circuit affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of signal wires communication cables and main circuit wires gt Improve the noise control measures gt Separate the signal wires from main power wires as far as possible 21 amp c Step out detection for drive of permanent magnet synchronous motors Problem The step out of the PMSM was detected Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether the settings of F04
60. The display is in units of 1000 hours The cumulative time should be used just a guide since the actual service life will be significantly affected by the temperature and operation environment 2 Early warning of lifetime alarm For the components listed in Table 7 3 you can get an early warning of lifetime alarm at the transistor output terminal Y1 and the relay contact terminals 30A B C as soon as any of the conditions listed under the Judgment level column has been exceeded When the replacement data of any parts exceeds the judgment level this signal comes ON Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm Parts to be replaced Judgment level DC link bus capacitor 85 or lower of the initial capacitance at shipment Electrolytic capacitors on the 87000 hours or longer as cumulative run time printed circuit boards Estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load when running 12 hours day Cooling fan 87000 hours or longer as cumulative run time Estimated service life at the inverter s ambient temperature of 40 C under 80 of full load when running 12 hours day 7 4 Measurement of Electrical Amounts in Main Circuit Because the voltage and current of the power supply input primary circuit of the main circuit of the inverter and those of the motor output secondary circuit contain harmonic components the readings may vary with the type of the meter Use mete
61. aware that any items such as specifications which are not specifically mentioned in the contract catalog specifications or other materials will be as mentioned below In addition the products included in these materials are limited in the use they are put to and the place where they can be used etc and may require periodic inspection Please confirm these points with your sales representative or directly with this company Furthermore regarding purchased products and delivered products we request that you take adequate consideration of the necessity of rapid receiving inspections and of product management and maintenance even before receiving your products 1 Free of charge warranty period and warranty range 1 Free of charge warranty period 1 The product warranty period is 1 year from the date of purchase or 24 months from the manufacturing date imprinted on the name place whichever date is earlier 2 However in cases where the use environment conditions of use use frequency and times used etc have an effect on product life this warranty period may not apply 3 Furthermore the warranty period for parts restored by Fuji Electric s Service Department is 6 months from the date that repairs are completed Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 9 2 Warranty range 1 In the event that breakdown occurs during the product s warranty period which is the
62. below the undervoltage detection level the DC link bus voltage and measure the input voltage gt Connect the inverter to a power supply that meets its input specifications Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 9 6 3 If an Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor E Quick reference table of alarm codes EN OLI Instantaneous overcurrent Braking resistor overheated Refer to Motor 1 overload Motor 2 overload Inverter overload HII Lit Memory error Overvoltage m Keypad communications error CPU error Undervoltage Operation protection 1 L 7 Input phase loss 7 Tuning error eM Lim Output phase loss RS 485 communications error I I Limi i Heat sink overheat Data saving error during undervoltage II Lin External alarm C Mock alarm rin Motor protection PTC thermistor LUT PID feedback wire break Step out detection for drive of permanent magnet synchronous motors 1 lt n Instantaneous overcurrent Problem The inverter momentary output current exceeded the overcurrent level ef Overcurrent occurred during acceleration hee Overcurrent occurred during deceleration tia Overcurrent occurred during running at a constant speed Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter output lines were short circuited Check if the r
63. by E98 and E99 Terminal commands assigned Select multistep frequency 0 to 15 steps Note Any negative logic Active OFF command cannot be assigned to the functions marked with in the Active OFF column The Enable external alarm trip and Force to stop are fail safe terminal commands For example when data 9 in Enable external alarm trip Active OFF alarm is triggered when OFF when data 1009 Active ON alarm is triggered when ON Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 45 Terminal function assignment and data setting Select multistep frequency 0 to 15 steps S81 SS2 SS4 and SS8 amp Function code data 0 1 2 and 3 The combination of the ON OFF states of digital input signals S81 SS2 SS4 and SS8 selects one of 16 different frequency commands defined beforehand by 15 function codes C05 to C19 Multistep frequency 0 to 15 With this the inverter can drive the motor at 16 different preset frequencies The table below lists the frequencies that can be obtained by the combination of switching SS1 SS2 SS4 and SS8 In the Selected frequency column Other than multistep frequency represents the reference frequency sourced by frequency command 1 F01 frequency command 2 C30 or others ected frequency Other than multistep frequency c0
64. capability an overvoltage trip will occur The forced brake control increases the motor energy loss during deceleration increasing the deceleration torque Note This function is aimed at controlling the torque during deceleration it has no effect if there is braking load Enabling the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 disables the deceleration characteristics specified by H71 When replacing the original FRENIC Mini series FRN c10 00 with the upgraded one FRN c20 00 note the following The original FRENIC Mini series FRANO00C10 O00 does not support H71 but H71 may be set to 1 On the upgraded one however it is not necessary to set H71 to 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 75 H94 Cumulative Run Time of Motor 1 Operating the keypad can display the cumulative run time of motor 1 This feature is useful for management and maintenance of the machinery Using H94 can modify the cumulative run time of the motor to the desired value to be used as an arbitrary initial data Specifying 0 clears the cumulative run time H98 Protection Maintenance Function Mode selection H98 specifies whether to enable or disable a automatic lowering of carrier frequency b input phase loss protection c output phase loss prote
65. capacitor having the good cut off characteristics for high frequency between control signal wires as shown in Figure 2 6 Do not apply a voltage of 7 5 VDC or higher to terminal C1 Doing so could damage the internal control circuit i a D 2 m c lt Control creuit Extemal dewce Capacitar lt Ceatral circu Outpulling analog O O22uF SOV 14 y signal 1 if a 3 12 3 12 ise ais me 11 Oe n Bea ayes a Ferrite core Potentiometer Pass the canie oh 1kto5kQ Pase the came ohate wires teraugh or tu ri thom around the erria mare 2 or 3 tunes Figure 2 5 Connection of Shielded Wire Figure 2 6 Example of Electric Noise Reduction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 13 Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Digital 1 The various signals such as Coast to a stop Enable external alarm input 1 trip and Select multistep frequency can be assigned to terminals X1 to X3 FWD and REV by setting function codes E01 to E03 E98 and Digital E99 For details refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 2 Details of Function input 2 Codes Digital 2 Input mode i e Sink Source is changeable by using the internal jumper input 3 switch 3 Switches the logic value 1 0 for ON OFF of the terminals between X1 to X3 FWD or REV and CM If the logic val
66. cause of the equipment error RS 485 converter did not operate due to incorrect connections or settings or defective hardware Check the RS 485 converter e g check for poor contact gt Change the various RS 485 converter settings reconnect the wires or replace hardware with recommended devices as appropriate Broken communications cable or poor contact Check the continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Replace the cable 6 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures gt Implement noise reduction measures at the host side gt Replace the RS 485 converter with a recommended insulated one Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 21 18 amp F Data saving error during undervoltage Problem The inverter failed to save data such as the frequency commands PID commands timer values for timer operation which are specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands when the power was switched OFF Possible Causes 1 During data saving performed when the power was turned OFF the voltage fed to the control PCB dropped in an abnormally short period due to the rapid discharge of the DC li
67. code data 0 except that RUN2 is ON even when the DC braking is in operation m Overload prevention control OLP Function code data 36 This output signal comes ON when the overload prevention control is activated The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the description of H70 E Current detected and Current detected 2 ID and ID2 Function code data 37 38 The ID or ID2 output signal comes ON when the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by E34 Current detection Level or E37 Current detection 2 Level for the time longer than the one specified by E35 Current detection Timer or E38 Current detection 2 Timer respectively The minimum ON duration is 100 ms The ID or ID2 goes OFF when the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level These two output signals can be assigned to two different digital output terminals independently if necessary Note Function code E34 is effective for not only the motor overload early warning OL but also for the operation level of the current detection ID Refer to the description of E34 Low current detected IDL Function code data 41 This output signal comes ON when the inverter output current drops below the low current detection level E34 and it remains at the low level for the timer period E35 When the output current exceeds the current detection level E37 by 5 or more of the inverter rated current this signal goes
68. for Storage and Transportation Item Requirements Storage i 25 to 70 C Locations where the inverter is not temperature subject to abrupt changes in x2 temperature that would result in the Relative 5 to 95 formation of condensation or ice humidity Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive or flammable gases oil mist vapor water drops or vibration The atmosphere can contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa in storage pressure 70 to 106 kPa during transportation Assuming a comparatively short storage period e g during transportation or the like Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements avoid such places where the inverter will be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Precautions for temporary storage 1 Do not leave the inverter directly on the floor 2 If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed in Table 1 1 wrap the inverter in an airtight vinyl sheet or the like for storage 3 If the inverter is to be stored in an environment with a high level of humidity put a drying agent such as silica gel in the airtight package described in item 2 1 4 2 Long term storage The long term storage methods for the inverter vary largely according to the environment of the storage site General storage method
69. frequency 1 F04 Variable torque V f pattern F37 0 Output voltage v Rated voltage 100 Torque Oulput boost lg frequency Base Hz frequency 1 FD4 Linear V f pattern F37 1 Tip When the variable torque V f pattern is selected F37 0 or 3 the output voltage may be low and insufficient voltage output may result in less output torque of the motor at a low frequency zone depending on some characteristics of the motor itself and load In such a case it is recommended to increase the output voltage at the low frequency zone using the non linear V f pattern H50 H51 Recommended value H50 1 10 of the base frequency H51 1 10 of the voltage at base frequency Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 26 Output voltage v Yariable torque oulput using non linear VA pattern Rated volage al base frequency 1 700 ye F035 a Variable torque output Non linear ee not using non linear Vif patlarr Vif pattern 7 Voltage H51 Output frequency 2 Non linear vif pattern 1 Base Hz Frequency frequency 4 HS FOa E Torque boost Manual torque boost F09 In torque boost using F09 constant voltage is added to the basic V f pattern regardless of the load to give the output voltage To secure a sufficient starting torque manually adjust the output voltage to optimally match the motor and its load by using F09 Specify an appropriate
70. gt Readjust the setting of F44 to an appropriate value or disable the function of current limiter with F43 gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 3 The automatic Check the data of function code H69 Automatic deceleration deceleration Mode selection Anti regenerative control is enabled during deceleration gt Increase the deceleration time F08 and E11 4 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 In winter the load tends to increase 5 Torque generated by the Check that the motor starts running if the value of the torque boost motor was insufficient F09 A05 is increased gt Increase the value of the torque boost F09 A05 6 An external _ Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external potentiometer is used for sources frequency setting i o a a y 9 gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the external frequency potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire See Figure 2 6 7 The specified Check the terminal command RT1 Select ACC DEC time acceleration deceleration i time is incorrect gt Correct the RT1 setting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 W
71. ignored Even if H12 1 an overcurrent trip occurs due to an overcurrent incident Instantaneous overcurrent limiter Restart mode after When the F14 data is set to either 4 or 5 the inverter restarts with pull in by momentary power current ailure Automatic When H69 1 the automatic deceleration is performed only on inverters deceleration compatible with the original FRENIC Mini series FRN C10 O0 anti regenerative a ae When H69 2 or 4 no automatic deceleration is performed control Not available for a PMSM Brake signal It is always OFF Jogging operation Not available for a PMSM DC braking Not available for a PMSM Be sure to consult the motor manufacturers before actual operation Others A failure could occur Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 79 Chapter6 TROUBLESHOOTING 6 1 Before Proceeding with Troubleshooting WARNINGA If any of the protective functions has been activated first remove the cause Then after checking that the all run commands are set to OFF reset the alarm If the alarm is released while any run command is set to ON the inverter may supply the power to the motor running the motor Injury may occur Even though the inverter has interrupted power to the motor if the voltage is applied to the main circuit power input termina
72. is used to manually set a reference frequency auxiliary frequencies 1 and 2 or PID process command fun RUN key Press this key to run the motor Gree STOP key Press this key to stop the motor oar R UP DOWN keys Press these keys to select the setting items and change the LYM function code data displayed on the LED monitor Program Reset key which switches the operation modes of the inverter m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the inverter to Program ming mode Se m In Programming eee this key switches the inverter to Running mode m In Alarm mode Pressing this key after removing the error factor switches the inverter to Running mode Function Data key which switches the operation you want to do in each mode as follows m In Running mode Pressing this key switches the information to be dis played concerning the status of the inverter output fas frequency output current output voltage etc wy E In Programming mode Pressing this key displays the function codes and sets their data entered with the and iw keys or the POT E In Alarm mode Pressing this key displays detailed alarm information FRENIC Mini features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm Refer to Section 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 1 m Simultaneous keying Simultaneous keying means pressing two keys at the same time expre
73. it serves as a source for the control lt Controd cireuil gt lt PLC gt lt Centrol circuit Serves as Sink Transistor output Serves as Source a PLC serving as sink b PLC serving as source Figure 2 9 Connecting PLC to Control Circuit Alarm relay output for any fault a os _ fo 5 6 c fe is gt s a Outputs a contact signal SPDT when a protective function has been activated to stop the motor Contact rating 250 VAC 0 3A cos 0 3 48 VDC 0 5A A command similar to terminal Y1 can be selected for the transistor output signal and use it for signal output Switching of the normal negative logic output is applicable to the fol lowing two contact outputs Terminals 380A and 30C are short circuited for ON signal output or Terminals 30B and 30C are short circuited non excite for ON signal output RJ 45 connector RS 485 Communication Used to connect an optional keypad to the inverter Used to connect the inverter to a computer running FRENIC Loader via the RS 485 communications link For the terminating resistor refer to Section 2 3 7 Terminating 8 Vcc RJ 45 connector resistor Sw3 RJ 45 connector Figure 2 10 RJ 45 Connector and its Pin Assignment Pins 1 2 7 and 8 are exclusively assigned to power lines for an optional keypad When connecting any other device to the
74. keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 10 C codes continued Incre Change Data Default Refer Code Name Data setting range merit Unit when copying settin to running Pying g page C94 Jump Frequency 4 1 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 0 0 C95 5 gt Y 0 0 C96 6 Y Y 0 0 C99 Digital Reference 0 00 to 400 00 0 01 Hz Y 0 00 Frequency 1 P codes Motor 1 Parameters Change Refer Code Name Data setting range Incte Unit when Data Defaut to ment lt n copying setting i running page P02 Motor 1 0 01 to 30 00 0 01 kW N Y1 See 5 61 Rated capacity kW when P99 0 3 4 20 or 21 0 01 HP Y2 Table A 0 01 to 30 00 HP when P99 1 P03 Rated current 0 00 to 100 0 0 01 A N Y1 Rated Y2 value of Fuji istandard motor P04 Auto tuning 0 Disable i a N N 0 1 Tune when the motor stops R1 X 2 Tune when the motor is rotating under V f control R1 X no load current slip frequency Po6 No load current 0 00 to 50 00 0 01 A N Yi Rated Y2 value of P07 R1 0 00 to 50 00 ooi Y Yi Ful Y2 istandard motor P08 X 0 00 to 50 00 0 01 Y Y1 Y2 P09 Slip compensation gain 0 0 to 200 0 0 1 y Y 100 0 5 62
75. more than 2 wires protective device RCD to terminal P Earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection Other inverter Magnetic contactor Braking resistor DC reactor CAUTION When wiring the inverter to the OCR i power supply of 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Figure 2 3 Wiring Procedure for Peripheral Equipment Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 7 The wiring procedure for the FRN0006C2S 20 is given below as an example For other inverter types perform wiring in accordance with their individual terminal arrangement Refer to page 2 3 Grounding terminal 3G Be sure to ground either of the two grounding terminals for safety and noise reduction It is stipulated by the Electric Facility Technical Standard that all metal frames of electrical equipment must be grounded to avoid electric shock fire and other disasters Grounding terminals should be grounded as follows 1 Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code 2 Connect a thick grounding wire with a large surface area Keep the wiring length as short as possible Inverter output terminals U V W and grounding terminal 8G 1 Connect the three wires of the three phase motor to terminals U V and W aligning phases each other 2 Connect the grounding wire of terminals U V and W to th
76. of the inverter by reducing the load For fans or pumps decrease the frequency limiter value F15 Note If you disable H98 an or L alarm may occur 3 Resonance with the load Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Check the machinery mounting accuracy or check whether there is resonance with the mounting base gt Disconnect the motor from the machinery and run it alone then find where the resonance comes from Upon locating the cause improve the characteristics of the source of the resonance gt Adjust the settings of C01 Jump frequency 1 to C04 Jump frequency Hysteresis width so as to avoid continuous running in the frequency range causing resonance 6 6 6 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The inverter ran the Check the data of function code H07 Acceleration deceleration motor with S curve or pattern curvilinear pattern gt Select the linear pattern H07 0 gt Shorten the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 and E11 2 The current limiting Make sure that F43 Current limiter Mode selection is set to 2 operation prevented the Enable during acceleration and at constant speed then check that output frequency from the setting of F44 Current limiter Level is reasonable increasing during acceleration
77. press the S key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 With the menu displayed use the wz and Oe keys to select Drive monitoring Sa 3 Press the ss key to display the desired code in the monitoring item list e g 7_L 4 Use the wz and we keys to select the desired monitoring item then press the ee key The running status information for the selected item appears 5 Press the ee key to return to the monitoring item list Press the ao key again to return to the menu Table 3 8 Drive Monitoring Display Items LED monitor Contents Description Output frequency Output frequency before slip compensation Output frequency Output frequency after slip compensation Output current Present output current Output voltage Vv Present output voltage Reference frequency Present reference frequency Displays the running direction being outputted Running direction F forward R reverse stop Displays the running status in hex format Refer to Displaying Running status running status on the next page The unit for load shaft speed is r min and that for line speed is m min Display value Output frequency Hz before slip compensation Load shaft speed x Function code E50 line speed appears for 10 000 r min or m min or more When 7 is displayed the data is overflowing which means that the func ion code should be reviewed For exam
78. required during motor opera tion use FWD REV signals or the ux fr keys Protecting the motor The electronic thermal function of the inverter can protect the motor The operation level and the motor type gen eral purpose motor inverter motor should be set For high speed motors or water cooled motors set a small value for the thermal time constant and protect the motor If you connect the motor thermal relay to the motor with a long wire a high frequency current may flow into the wiring stray capacitance This may cause the relay to trip at a cur rent lower than the set value for the thermal relay If this happens lower the carrier frequency or use the output circuit filter OFL Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xii Discontinuance of power factor correcting ca pacitor Do not mount power factor correcting capacitors in the in verter s primary circuit Use the DC reactor to improve the inverter power factor Do not use power factor correcting capacitors in the inverter output circuit An overcurrent trip will occur disabling motor operation Discontinuance of surge killer Do not connect a surge killer to the inverter s secondary circuit Combina 7 5 aoa A 3 3 i Use of a filter and shielded wires is typically recommended to tion with Reducing noise RAPEN peripheral satisfy EMC direc
79. running 2 RUN2 Overload prevention control OLP ID ID2 37 1037 38 1038 41 1041 Current detected Current detected 2 Low current detected IDL Under PID control PID CTL Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control PID STP SWM2 Motor overheat detected by thermistor THM Brake signal BRKS Terminal C1 wire break C10FF MNT 43 1043 44 1044 49 1049 Switched to motor 2 56 1056 57 1057 59 1059 84 1084 87 1087 Maintenance timer Frequency arrival detected FARFDT 99 1099 Alarm output for any alarm ALM Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic output to a terminal N Y 0 5 52 N T 99 E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width 0 0 to 10 0 0 1 Hz 2 5 5 56 E31 Frequency Detection Detection level E32 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz JACU 60 0 E 50 0 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz 1 0 E34 Overload Early Warning Current Detection Low Current Detection Level Timer E35 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 100 0 Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter rated current 0 01 Y1 Y2 See 5 57 Table A 0 01 to 600 00 2 0 01 S Y Y 10 00 Note Alphabets in the Default seti 2 When you make settings from t display ting field denote shipping destination A Asia C C
80. s 2 x 5 100 90 100 2 x 5 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 1 x reference acceleration or deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration strong when the frequency change is 20 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time s 2 x 10 100 80 100 2 x 10 100 x reference acceleration or deceleration time 1 2 x reference acceleration or deceleration time Curvilinear acceleration deceleration Acceleration deceleration is linear below the base frequency constant torque but it slows down above the base frequency to maintain a certain level of load factor constant output This acceleration deceleration pattern allows the motor to accelerate or decelerate with the maximum performance of the motor Choose an appropriate acceleration deceleration time taking into account the Note machinery s load torque H11 Deceleration Mode H11 specifies the deceleration mode to be applied when a run command is turned OFF Data for H11 Function 0 Normal deceleration The inverter decelerates and stops the motor according to deceleration commands specified by H07 Acceleration deceleration pattern F08 Deceleration time 1 and E11 Deceleration time 2 1 Coast to stop The inverter immediately shuts down its output so the motor stops according to the inertia of the motor and machine and their kinetic energy losses When reduci
81. same way as with the frequency settings Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 12 T a Power ON N Running s mode 7 List of function codes Function code data A ay co whe OR cy Save dala and go to the next function code Figure 3 5 Example of Function Code Data Changing Procedure 3 4 2 Checking changed function codes Data Checking Menu 2 Data checking in Programming mode allows you to check function codes that have been changed Only the function codes whose data has been changed from the factory defaults are displayed on the LED monitor You may refer to the function code data and change it again if nec essary Figure 3 6 shows the status transition diagram for Data checking Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 13 Power ON ss ies List of function codes Funclion code data g 4 fa E en a u ue 3 T fds e fat hee Ol t SALE 7 A aes Ae a Save data and go to the next function code Bane et X Sll eng ee Go to the next WIE function code fai P EGO a Z A eve Go to the next Y function code H Pressing the ee key with the 5c data displayed returns to 7 i Figure 3 6 Data Checking Status Transition When changes are made only to
82. show the arrangement of the main and control circuit terminals which differs according to inverter type The two terminals prepared for grounding which are indicated by the symbol 8G in Figures A to D make no distinction between the power supply side primary circuit and the motor side secondary circuit 1 Arrangement of the main circuit terminals Table 2 3 Main Circuit Terminals Power Nominal ap Terminal Tightening supply plied motor Inverter type screw size torque Refer to voltage kW N m 0 1 FRN0001C2S 20 2 FRNO002C2S 0002c eS er M3 5 1 2 Figure A Three 0 4 FRNO004C2S 20 phase 0 75 FRNOO06C2S 20 200 V 1 5 FRNOO10C2S 20 2 2 FRNOO12C2S 20 3 7 FRNOO20C2S 20 0 4 FRN0002C2S 40 a 0 75 FRNOO04C2S 40 M4 1 8 Figure B ree phase 1 5 FRN0005C2S 40 400 V 2 2 FRN0007C2S 40 3 7 4 0 FRN0011C2S 40 0 1 FRN0001C2S 70 2 FRNO002C2S i Single 000202S 40 M3 5 1 2 Figure C phase 0 4 FRN0004C2S 70 200 V 0 75 FRN0006C2S 70 1 FRN 5 Doses ie M4 1 8 Figure D 2 2 FRNOO12C2S 70 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN0011C2S 4E Figure A Figure A Re ad C Wy a RF eir egs aT ei Lei Ni F ec el olele z GB u wt H eof F gure G
83. signal digital input Switchable to frequency settings given through the communications link or multistep frequency setting Auxiliary frequency setting Each of inputs from the built in potentiometer and terminal 12 C1 can be added to the main setting as auxiliary frequency settings Inverse operation Switchable from 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 to 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 by external signals Switchable from 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 to 20 to 4 mA DC 20 to 0 mA DC 0 to 100 by external signals Acceleration deceleration time Setting range 0 00 to 3600 s variable The two types of acceleration deceleration time settings can be made or selected individually switchable during running e Acceleration deceleration pattern Acceleration and deceleration pattern can be selected from 4 types Linear S curve weak S curve strong and Curvilinear maximum acceleration deceleration capacity of constant output Shutoff of a run command causes the motor to coast to a stop e The acceleration deceleration time for jogging can be set Setting range 0 00 to 3600 s Various functions Frequency limiter peak and bottom limiters Bias frequency Gain for frequency command Jump frequency control Jogging operation 1 Timer operation Restart after momentary power failure 1 Slip compensation 1 Deceleration characteristics Forced brake control Current limit Hardware current limite
84. system circuits to switch the motor drive power source to the commercial factory power lines after the motor has come to a complete stop Also ensure that voltage is never mistakenly applied to the inverter output terminals due to unexpected timer operation or similar m Driving the motor using commercial power lines MCs can also be used to switch the power source of the motor driven by the inverter to a commercial power source Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 2 Name of option Function and application Braking resistors Abraking resistor converts regenerative energy generated from deceleration Standard model of the motor and converts it to heat for consumption Use of a braking DBRs resistor results in improved deceleration performance of the inverter DC reactors A DCR is mainly used for power supply normalization and for supplied DCRs power factor reformation for reducing harmonic components 1 For power supply normalization Use an optional DC reactor DCR when the capacity of the power supply transformer exceeds 500 kVA and is 10 times or more the inverter s rated capacity Otherwise the percentage reactance of the power source decreases and harmonic components and their peak levels increase These factors may break rectifiers or capacitors in the converter section of inverter or decrease the capacitance of the capacitor whi
85. the QN key Tip e Applying terminal command FWD or REV instead of the key command can also start the timer operation Operating procedure for timer operation example Preparation To display the timer count on the LED monitor set E43 LED Monitor to 13 Timer and set C21 Timer Operation to 1 Enable Specify the reference frequency to apply to timer operation When the keypad is selected as a frequency command source press the e key to shift to the speed monitor and specify the desired reference frequency Triggering the timer operation with the foal key 1 While watching the timer count displayed on the LED monitor press the AR key to set the timer for the desired count in seconds Note that the timer count on the LED monitor appears as an integral number without a decimal point 2 Press the F key The motor starts running and the timer starts counting down If the timer counts down the motor stops without pressing the amp key Even if the LED monitor displays any item except the timer count the timer operation is possible Note After the countdown of the timer operation triggered by a terminal command such as FWD the inverter decelerates to stop and at that moment the LED monitor displays Ec and any LED monitor item for the timer count alternately Turning FWD OFF returns to the LED monitor item C33 Analog Input Adjustment for Terminal 12 Filter time constant C38 Analog Input Adjustmen
86. the electronic thermal function for the purpose of warning protecting the motor Stall prevention Operates if the inverter s output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limit level avoiding tripping of the inverter during constant speed operation or during acceleration External alarm Stops the inverter output with an alarm through the digital input ae Yes input signal THR Alarm relay The inverter outputs a relay contact signal when the inverter issues Yes output an alarm and stops the inverter output for any fault lt Alarm Reset gt The alarm stop state is reset by pressing the key or by the digital input signal RST lt Saving the alarm history and detailed data gt The information on the previous 4 alarms can be saved and displayed Memory error The inverter checks memory data after power on and when the Eri Yes data is written If a memory error is detected the inverter stops Remote keypad The inverter stops by detecting a communication error between the Yes option inverter and the remote keypad option during operation from the communications remote keypad error CPU error If the inverter detects a CPU error caused by noise or some other Eri Yes factor the inverter stops Operation error STOP key Pressing the key on the keypad forces the inverter Er amp Yes priority to decelerate and stop the motor even if the inverter is running by any run commands given via the terminals or com
87. the external wiring from the control circuit terminals 2 Perform a continuity test to the ground One MQ or a larger measurement indicates a correct state 3 Insulation test of external main circuit and sequence control circuit Disconnect all the wiring connected to the inverter so that the test voltage is not applied to the inverter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 8 7 6 Inquiries about Product and Guarantee 7 6 1 When making an inquiry Upon breakage of the product uncertainties failure or inquiries inform your Fuji Electric representative of the following information 1 Inverter type Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 SER No serial number of equipment Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 3 Function codes and their data that you changed from the factory defaults Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 2 4 ROM version Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 5 5 Date of purchase 6 Inquiries for example point and extent of breakage uncertainties failure phenomena and other circumstances 7 Production year amp week Refer to Chapter 1 Section 1 1 7 6 2 Product warranty To all our customers who purchase Fuji Electric products included in this documentation Please take the following items into consideration when placing your order When requesting an estimate and placing your orders for the products included in these materials please be
88. the standard specifications table for the inverter Selecting eral purpose When high starting torque is required or quick acceleration or inverter motor deceleration is required select an inverter with a capacity capacity one size greater than the standard Driving special Select an inverter that meets the following condition motors Inverter rated current gt Motor rated current When exporting an inverter built in a panel or equipment pack them in a previously fumigated wooden crate Do not fumigate them after packing since some parts Transpor inside the inverter may be corroded by halogen compounds such as methyl bro tation and mide used in fumigation storage When packing an inverter alone for export use a laminated veneer lumber LVL For other transportation and storage instructions see Chapter 1 Section 1 3 Transportation and Section 1 4 Storage Environment Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xiii How this manual is organized This manual is made up of chapters 1 through 11 Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER This chapter describes acceptance inspection and precautions for transportation and storage of the inverter Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER This chapter provides operating environment precautions for installing the inverter wiring instruc tions for the motor and inverter Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD This chap
89. to 0 000 clears the input watt hour and its data to 0 After clearing be sure to restore E51 data to the previous value otherwise input watt hour data will not be accumulated Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 58 E52 Keypad Menu display mode E52 provides a choice of three menu display modes for the keypad as listed below Data for E52 Menu display mode Menus to be displayed 0 Function code data editing mode Menu 1 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 2 Full menu mode Menus 1 through 6 Menus 1 through 7 when a remote keypad is connected Tip Selecting the full menu mode E52 2 allows you to cycle through the menus with the X or V key and select the desired menu item with the G5 key Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display returns to the first menu item E60 Built in Potentiometer Function selection E61 Terminal 12 Extended Function E62 Terminal C1 Extended Function E60 through E62 define the property of the built in potentiometer and terminals 12 and C1 respectively There is no need to set up the potentiometer and terminals if they are to be used for frequency command sources Data for E60 E61 or E62 0 None Function Description This is an auxiliary analog frequency input to be added to Auxiliary frequency frequency command 1 F01 It is never added to command
90. to Check and Suggested Measures Check the signals for the frequency command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Increase the filter constants C33 C38 for the frequency command 2 An external frequency command potentiometer is used Check that there is no noise in the control signal wires from external sources gt Isolate the control signal wires from the main circuit wires as far as possible gt Use shielded or twisted wires for control signals Check whether the frequency command has not failed because of noise from the inverter gt Connect a capacitor to the output terminal of the potentiometer or set a ferrite core on the signal wire See Figure 2 6 3 Frequency switching or multistep frequency command was enabled Check whether the relay signal for switching the frequency command is chattering gt If the relay contact is defective replace the relay Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 5 Possible Causes 4 The wiring length between the inverter and the motor is too long What to Check and Suggested Measures Check whether auto torque boost or auto energy saving operation is enabled gt Perform auto tuning of the inverter for every motor to be used gt Select constant torque load F37 A13 1 and check for any vibration gt Make the output wires as short as possible 5 The ma
91. transistor output signal Y1 and relay output signals 30A B C will not be turned ON Note If negative logic is specified for the transistor output and relay output signals they are considered ON when the inverter is not running Specify positive logic for them e Keep the ambient temperature within 25 10 C 2 Switch ON the main circuit power 3 Confirm that the cooling fan is rotating and the inverter is in stopped state 4 Switch OFF the main circuit power 5 Start the measurement of the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Make sure that appears on the LED monitor Note f does not appear on the LED monitor the measurement will not start Check the conditions listed in 1 6 Once has disappeared from the LED monitor switch ON the main circuit power again 7 Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and note the reading relative capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 4 T 2 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor during power off time under ordinary operating condition If the measuring method for discharging condition of the DC link bus capacitor during a power off time under the ordinary operating condition at the end user s installation is different from the initial measuring method at the time of factory shipment the capacitance of the DC link b
92. under the following conditions Short circuit current in the supply 10 kA Maximum 240 V Maximum 480 V Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net ix Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU Continued ACAUTION 12 Use wires listed in IEC60364 5 52 Recommended wire size mm g 1 Main circuit Appli jain circui A DCR cable Raga on A power input is P1 orral nverter amp motor Inverter tyP Imcca or REDELCB H R L S c30 out PC Goa a rating L1 L L2 N Braking 30B g kW Grounding amp G Bane resistor Bae 3 a I IP w o DCR w DCR w o DCR DB 0 1 FRNOOO1C2S 20 gt 0 2 FRNOO02C2S 20 6 2 6 A 0 4 FRN0004C2S 20 g 25 2 5 S 0 75 FRNOOO6C2S 20 10 2 5 25 0 5 a 1 5 _ FRNOO10C2S 20 is 16 E 22 JFRNOO12C28 20 20 3 7 FRN0020C2S 20 20 35 4 4 gt 0 4 _ FRNOOO2C2S 40 0 75 FRN0004C2S 40 6 o 8 1 5 FRNOO05C2S 40 10 25 25 25 25 0 5 g 2 2 FRNOOO7C2S 40 16 37 10 go FRN0011C28 40 20 gt 01 FRN0001C2S 70 6 S 0 2 FRNOOO2C2S 70 6 a 2 5 2 0 4 FRNOOO4C2S 70 10 2 5 2 5 S 25 0 5 a 0 75 FRNOOO6C2S 7 10 16 o 1 5 FRNOO10C2S 70 16 20 4 9 22 FRNOO12C28 70 20 35 4 6 4 MCCB Molded case ci
93. www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 5 E codes Extension Terminal Functions Code Name Data setting range Incre ment Unit Change when running Data copying Default setting Refer to page E01 E02 E03 Terminal X1 Function Terminal X2 Function Terminal X3 Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals X1 to X3 as listed below 0 1000 Select multistep frequency SS7 Select multistep frequency SS2 Select multistep frequency S84 Select multistep frequency SS8 1004 Select ACC DEC time RT1 Enable 3 wire operation HLD Coast to a stop BX Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 11 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 12 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 13 Enable DC braking DCBRK 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 19 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 LE 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input Active OFF to a terminal Note that i
94. you can display any of the following according to the setting of function code E48 Output frequency Hz Reference frequency Hz Load shaft speed r min Line speed m min and Constant rate of feeding time min 2 Applicable only when PID control is employed 3 Applicable only when timer operation is selected by the setting of function code C21 4 Applicable only when the remote keypad option is connected to the inverter 5 Alarm can be reset with the e key only when the current alarm code is displayed Figure 3 2 Transition between Basic Display Screens by Operation Mode Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 3 3 3 Running mode When the inverter is turned on it automatically enters Running mode In Running mode you can 1 Monitor the running status e g output frequency output current 2 Set up the reference frequency and PID process command and 3 Run stop the motor 3 3 1 Monitoring the running status In Running mode the nine items listed below can be monitored Immediately after the inverter is turned ON the monitor item specified by function code E43 is displayed Press the Se key to switch between these monitor items Table 3 3 Monitor Items Display Sample Function Monitor Items on the LED Meaning of Displayed Value Code Data monitor Note 1 for E43 Function code E48 specifies what to be displayed on the LED Speed monitor mon
95. 0 25 to 0 49 0 25 1 40 1 12 11 02 13 84 2 50 0 50 to 0 99 0 5 2 00 1 22 6 15 8 80 2 50 1 00 to 1 99 1 3 00 1 54 3 96 8 86 2 50 2 00 to 2 99 2 5 80 2 80 4 29 7 74 2 50 3 00 to 4 99 3 7 90 3 57 3 15 20 81 1 17 5 00 to 7 49 5 12 60 4 78 3 34 23 57 1 50 7 50 to 9 99 7 5 18 60 6 23 2 65 28 91 1 17 10 00 to 14 99 10 25 30 8 75 2 43 30 78 1 17 15 00 to 19 99 15 37 30 12 70 2 07 29 13 1 00 20 00 to 24 99 20 49 10 9 20 2 09 29 53 1 00 25 00 to 29 99 25 60 00 16 70 1 75 31 49 1 00 30 00 to 39 99 30 72 40 19 80 1 90 32 55 1 00 400 V class series for all destinations 460V 60 Hz rated voltage base frequency Motor capacity Nominal Rated No load R X Rated slip kW applied current current RA RA frequency motor A A Hz P02 A16 kw P03 A17 PO6 A20 P07 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 11 0 10 0 22 0 20 13 79 11 75 2 50 0 12 to 0 24 0 12 0 34 0 27 12 96 12 67 2 50 0 25 to 0 49 0 25 0 70 0 56 11 02 13 84 2 50 0 50 to 0 99 0 5 1 00 0 61 6 15 8 80 2 50 1 00 to 1 99 1 1 50 0 77 3 96 8 86 2 50 2 00 to 2 99 2 2 90 1 40 4 29 7 74 2 50 3 00 to 4 99 3 4 00 1 79 3 15 20 81 1 17 5 00 to 7 49 5 6 30 2 39 3 34 23 57 1 50 7 50 to 9 99 75 9 30 3 12 2 65 28 91 1 17 10 00 to 14 99 10 12 70 4 37 2 43 30 78 1 17 15 00 to 19 99 15 18 70 6 36 2 07 29 13 1 00 20 00 to 24 99 20 24 60 4 60 2 09 29 53 1 00 25 00 to 29 99 25 30 00 8 33 1 75 31 49 1 00 30 00 to 39 99 30 36 20 9 88 1 90 32 55
96. 0 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 11 Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS 8 1 Standard Models 8 1 1 Three phase 200 V class series O A U Specifications Type FRN____ C2S 2 Applicable motor rating k 4 when 0 2 0 4 1 5 2 2 Applicable motor rating when 1 4 1 2 2 3 Rated capacity kVA 2 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function 0 8 1 5 3 5 5 5 9 2 12 0 19 1 0 7 1 4 2 5 4 2 7 0 10 0 16 5 150 of rated output current for 1 min Overload capability 150 of rated output current for 1 min or 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s for the rated current given in parentheses Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Voltage and Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 frequency variations Frequency 5 to 5 w Rated DCR current A 6 w o DCR 1 1 1 8 3 1 5 3 9 5 22 2 0 30 0 57 1 3 2 0 3 5 4 5 Rated current A 4 Output Ratings Three phase 200 to 240 V 50 60 Hz 0 57 0 93 1 6 3 0 5 7 14 0 Input Ratings Required power supply capacity kVA 0 2 0 3 0 6 1 1 2 0 4 9 7 Torque 8 150 100 50 Braking starting frequency 9 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards UL508C I
97. 00 J04 Integral time 0 0 to 3600 0 2 0 1 s Y Y 0 0 J05 D Differential time 0 00 to 600 00 2 0 01 s Y Y 0 00 J06 Feedback filter 0 0 to 900 0 0 1 s Y Y 0 5 J15 Operation level 0 0 Disable 1 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 0 0 for slow flowrate stop J16 Elapsed time 0 to 3600 1 s Y Y 30 from slow flowrate stop J17 Initiation frequency 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 0 0 J23 Initiation deviation level 0 0 to 100 0 0 1 Y N 0 0 for slow flowrate stop J24 Start latency time 0 to 3660 1 s Y W 0 for slow flowrate stop J68 Braking Signal 0 to 200 1 Y Y 100 Brake OFF current J69 Brake OFF frequency 0 0 to 25 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 1 0 J70 Brake OFF timer 0 0 to 5 0 0 1 s Y ys 1 0 J71 Brake ON frequency 0 0 to 25 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 1 0 J72 Brake ON timer 0 0 to 5 0 0 1 s Y N 1 0 2 When you make settings from the keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 18 y codes Link Functions Code Name Data setting range Incre Unit nee Data Default ies ment running copying se
98. 00 m or lower 1 00 1000 to 1500 m 0 97 1500 to 2000 m 0 95 2000 to 2500 m 0 91 2500 to 3000 m 0 88 Note 1 When inverters are mounted side by side without any gap between them the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 40 C Note 2 Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to cotton waste or moist dust or dirt which will clog the heat sink in the inverter If the inverter is to be used in such an environ ment install it in the panel of your system or Item Specifications Site location Indoors Ambient 10 to 50 C IP20 Note 1 temperature Relative 5 to 95 No condensation humidity Atmosphere The inverter must not be exposed to dust direct sunlight corrosive gases flammable gas oil mist vapor or water drops Note 2 The atmosphere can contain only a low level of salt 0 01 mg cm or less per year The inverter must not be subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation to form Altitude 1 000 m max Note 3 Atmospheric 86 to 106 kPa pressure Vibration 3 mm Max amplitude 2 to less than 9 Hz 9 8 m s 9 to less than 20 Hz 2 mis 20 to less than 55 Hz 1 mis 55 to less than 200 Hz 2 2 Installing the Inverter 1 Mounting base The temperature of the heat sink may rise up to approx 90 C during operation of the inverter so the inverter should be mounted on a base made of material that can withstand temperature
99. 0000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour When the total time is 10000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the display will be reset to 0 and the count will start again No of startups The cumulative total number of times an inverter run command has been issued is calculated and displayed 1 000 indicates 1000 times When any number ranging from 0 001 to 9 999 is displayed the display increases by 0 001 per startup and when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is displayed the display increases by 0 01 every 10 startups When the total number exceeds 65535 the counter will be reset to 0 and start over again DC link bus voltage Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter s main circuit Unit V volts Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 27 LED monitor shows item No Table 3 16 Alarm Information Displayed Continued Contents Max temperature of heat sink Description Shows the temperature of the heat sink Unit C Terminal I O signal status displayed with the ON OFF of LED segments Signal input terminal status in hexadecimal format Terminal output signal status in hexadecimal format Shows the ON OFF status of the digital I O terminals Refer to Displaying control I O signal terminals
100. 1 through E03 Function code data 12 m Motor overheat detected by thermistor PTC THM Function code data 56 When the thermistor is enabled H26 2 this output signal comes ON if the motor temperature rises to the protection trigger level specified by H27 E Brake signal BRKS Function code data 57 This signal outputs a brake control command that releases or activates the brake m Terminal C1 wire break C1OFF Function code data 59 When terminal C1 is used for a feedback signal under PID control this output signal comes ON if the C1 wire breaks thereby enabling it to activate the protection function m Frequency arrival detected FARFDT Function code data 87 The FARFDT which is an ANDed signal of FAR and FDT comes ON when both signal conditions are met Alarm output for any alarm ALM Function code data 99 This output signal comes ON if any of the protective functions is activated and the inverter enters Alarm mode E30 Frequency Arrival Hysteresis width for FAR E30 specifies the detection level hysteresis width for FAR Frequency arrival signal The moment the output frequency reaches the zone defined by Reference frequency Hysteresis width specified by E30 the FAR comes ON The operation timings of signals are shown in the graph below Frequency command Change the frequency command Reference frequency 1 E30 fa 4mm gamm a m m m a e a e m a e Reference
101. 12 Rated slip frequency P09 Slip compensation gain for driving and P11 Slip compensation gain for braking E Dynamic torque vector control To get the maximal torque out of a motor this control calculates the motor torque for the load applied and uses it to optimize the voltage and current vector output Selecting this control automatically enables the auto torque boost and slip compensation function and disables auto energy saving operation This control is effective for improving the system response against external disturbances and the motor speed control accuracy E V f control for PMSM drive Under this control the inverter drives a permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM Refer to Section 5 3 Notes in Driving PMSM for details Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 41 F43 F44 When the output current of the inverter exceeds the level specified by the current limiter F44 the inverter automatically manages its output frequency to prevent a stall and limit the output current Refer to the description of function code H12 If F43 1 the current limiter is enabled only during constant speed operation If F43 2 the current limiter is enabled during both of acceleration and constant speed operation Choose F43 1 if you need to run the inverter at full capability during acceleration and to limit the output current during constant speed operation
102. 14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure H13 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Restart time H14 Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure Frequency fall rate F14 specifies the action to be taken by the inverter such as trip and restart in the event of a momentary power failure E Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection F14 Data for F14 Description As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter issues undervoltage alarm and shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state Disable restart Trip immediately Disable restart Trip after recovery from power failure Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter shuts down its output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state but it does not enter the undervoltage state or issue undervoltage alarm The moment the power is restored an undervoltage alarm Z is issued while the motor remains in a coast to stop state 5 31 Data for F14 Trip after decelerate to stop Description As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the continuous running level due to a momentary power failure decelerate to shop control is inv
103. 2 S curve Strong 3 Curvilinear H08 Rotational Direction 0 Disable a N y 0 Limitation 1 Enable Reverse rotation inhibited 2 Enable Forward rotation inhibited H11 Deceleration Mode 0 Normal deceleration Y 0 5 72 1 Coast to stop H12 Instantaneous 0 Disable Ni x 1 5 73 Overcurrent Limiting 1 Enable Mode selection H13 Restart Mode after 0 1 to 10 0 0 1 s Y Y1 0 5 5 31 Momentary Power Y2 Failure Restart time H14 Frequency fall rate 0 00 Deceleration time selected 0 01 Hz s Y Y 999 0 01 to 100 00 999 Depends upon current limiter H15 Continuous running 200 to 300 for 200 V class series 1 Vv Y Y2 235 level 1 400 to 600 for 400 V class series 470 H26 Thermistor for Motor 0 Disable oo y Y 0 Mode selection 1 Enable With PTC the inverter immediately trips with displayed 2 Enable With PTC the inverter issues output signal THM and continues to run H27 Level 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 V Y Y 0 16 H30 Communications Link Frequency command Run command Y Y 0 Function 0 F01 C30 F02 Mode selection 4 RS 485 F02 2 F01 C30 RS 485 3 RS 485 RS 485 H42 Capacitance of DC Link Indication for replacement of DC link bus 1 Y N Bus Capacitor capacitor 0000 to FFFF in hex H43 Cumulative Run Time of Indication for replacement of cooling fan 1 10h Y N Cooling Fan 0 to 9999 in units of 10 hours H44 Startup Counter of Motor Indication of cumulative startup co
104. 3 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Check that the LED monitor displays 7 indicating that the frequency command is 0 Hz that is blinking See Figure 4 2 If the LED monitor displays any number except 7 17 use the potentiometer to set 7 17 Check that the built in cooling fan rotates Inverters of FEN0010C2S 20 70 FRN0005C2S 4 Figure 4 2 Display of the LED Monitor or below are not equipped with a cooling fan after Power on 4 1 4 1 3 Preparation before a test run Configuring function code data Before running the motor configure function code data specified in Table 4 1 in accordance with the motor ratings and your system design values The motor ratings are printed on the nameplate of the motor For your system design values ask system designers about them QJ For details about how to change function code data refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 1 Setting the function codes Data Setting Refer to the function code H03 in Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES for the factory defaults of motor parameters If any of them is different from the default setting change the function code data e When using a PMSM refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 3 Notes in Driving PMSM Table 4 1 Settings of Function Code Data before a Test Run Factory setting Function Function code data Base frequency Rated voltage at base frequency Motor ratings m m M PO
105. 3 Notes in Driving PMSM When driving a permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM observe the following notes Items not covered in this section are the same as for induction motor IM drive The PMSM drive is available in the ROM version 0500 or later The ROM version can be checked with item 5_ 7on Menu 5 Maintenance information in Programming mode Item Drive by commercial power Specifications APMSM cannot be driven by commercial power Be sure to use an inverter A failure could occur Wiring Be sure to match inverter s output terminals U V and W with motor s input terminals U V and W Control mode When F42 11 V f control for PMSM drive At the start of driving the motor the inverter flows current equivalent to 80 of the motor rated current P03 to pull in the magnetic pole position for synchronization After that the inverter accelerates the motor to the reference frequency No magnetic pole position detection function is provided No auto search for an idling PMSM and restart function are provided Depending upon the magnetic pole position the motor may run in the reverse direction slightly at the start of running Speed control range The speed control range is from 10 to 100 of the base frequency F04 Set the reference frequency to 10 or more of the F04 data Motor constants The following motor parameters are used so consult the motor manufacturer and configure the corre
106. 31 Analog Output FMA Function These function codes allow terminal FMA to output monitored data such as the output frequency and the output current in an analog DC voltage The magnitude of the output voltage is adjustable E Voltage adjustment F30 F30 adjusts the output voltage representing the monitored data selected by F31 within the range of 0 to 300 4 F30 200 F30 100 F30 50 a Outof scale n A g 10V 5 gt 5 8 2 z 5v 5 3 E a 0 50 100 200 300 Meter scale Em Function F31 F31 specifies what is output to analog output terminal FMA Data for FM output Function Meter scale F31 P Monitor the following Full scale at 100 Output frequency Output frequency of the inverter before slip Equivalent to the motor Maximum frequency F03 A01 compensation synchronous speed Output frequency after slip Output frequency of the inverter Maximum frequency F03 A01 compensation Output current RMS of the inverter Output voltage RMS of the 250 V for 200 V class series inverter 500 V for 400 V class series Twice the rated output of the inverter put current Twice the inverter rated current put voltage Input power Input power of the inverter PID feedback Feedback amount under PID amount control DC link bus DC link bus voltage of the 500 V for 200 V class series voltage inverter 000 V for 400 V class series Full scale output of the meter
107. 4 Checking I O signal status I O Checking With Menu 4 I O checking you can display the I O status of external signals without using a measuring instrument External signals that can be displayed include digital I O signals and analog I O signals Table 3 12 lists check items available The status transition for I O checking is shown in Figure 3 8 Power ON ae Running S mode Programmin mode_ List of I O check items IO data Sin Sint 7 KS MESS F mo l l By LED segment ON OFF I O g 1 SoS In hex format input A Y G20 7 In hex format oulput s TN eye es By LED segment ON OFF I O OOSA In hex format input l oog in hex format output E SG input voltage at terminal 12 Y SOS q G Input current at terminal C1 mA yoy gt no Output voltage v to SONS at Pra analog voltmeter af my Figure 3 8 I O Checking Status Transition Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 19 Basic key operation Before checking the status of the I O signals set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode 1 When the inverter is powered on it automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the ga key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears With the menu displayed use the Wand keys to select I O check 4 sc B Press the key to display the
108. 5 of the rated current allowable Y2 Table continuous drive current of the motor A F12 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 0 1 min Y Y 5 0 F14 Restart Mode after 0 Disable restart Trip immediately Y Y AC 1 5 31 Momentary Power 1 Disable restart Trip after a recovery from EU 0 Failure power failure Mode selection 2 Trip after decelerate to stop 1 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency F15 Frequency Limiter High 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 70 0 5 35 F16 Low 0 0 to 400 0 01 Hz Y Y 0 0 Note Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination A Asia C China E Europe and U USA 1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 3 F codes continued Code Name Data setting range Incre ment Unit Change when running Data copying Default setting Refer to page F18 Bias Frequency command 1 100 00 to 100 00 2 0 01 y 0 00 5 36 F20 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level F21 F22 Braking time 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 Hz Y 0 0 0 to 100 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 30 00 0 01 0 00 5 37 F23 F24 Starting Frequency 1
109. 5 istep frequency 1 C06 istep frequency 2 C07 istep frequency 3 C08 istep frequency 4 cog istep frequency 5 C10 istep frequency 6 istep frequency 7 istep frequency 8 istep frequency 9 istep frequency 10 istep frequency 11 istep frequency 12 istep frequency 14 istep frequency 13 istep frequency 15 E Select ACC DEC time RT1 Function code data 4 This terminal command switches between ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 and ACC DEC time 2 E10 E11 If no RT1 command is assigned ACC DEC time 1 F07 F08 takes effect by default Input Ba he Acceleration deceleration time OFF Acceleration deceleration time 1 F07 F08 ON Acceleration deceleration time 2 E10 E11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 46 m Enable 3 wire operation HLD Function code data 6 Turning this terminal command ON self holds the forward FWD or reverse REV run command issued with it to enable 3 wire inverter operation Short circuiting the terminals between HLD and CM i e when HLD is ON self holds the first FWD or REV command at its leading edge Turning HLD OFF releases the self holding When HLD is not assigned 2 wire operation involving only FWD and REV takes effect Output frequenc i Ignored FWD REV on ON
110. 51 therefore the inverter issues an overheat alarm even if the surface temperature of the braking resistor does not rise To squeeze out full performance of the braking resistor configure function codes F50 and F51 while actually measuring the surface temperature of the braking resistor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 16 10 Motor 1 overload GLE Motor 2 overload Problem Electronic thermal protection for motor 1 or motor 2 activated Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The electronic thermal Check the motor characteristics characteristics do not match the motor overload characteristics gt Reconsider the data of function codes P99 F10 and F12 or A39 A06 and A08 gt Use an external thermal relay Activation level for the Check the continuous allowable current of the motor electronic thermal protection was gt Reconsider and change the data of function code F11 or A07 BS inadequate 3 The specified Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed acceleration for the current load based on the moment of inertia of the load and deceleration time was the acceleration deceleration time too short gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 4 Load was too heavy Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 to
111. 60 to 500V Output an AVR controlled ss voltage for 400 V class series E 230 400 U 230 460 A05 Torque Boost 2 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Y Y See percentage with respect to A03 Rated Table Voltage at Base Frequency 2 A A06 Electronic Thermal 1 For a general purpose motor with Y Y 1 Overload Protection for shaft driven cooling fan Motor 2 2 For an inverter driven motor with Motor characteristics separately powered cooling fan A07 Overload detection 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 100 0 0 01 A Y Y1 See level 1 to 135 of the rated current allowable Y2 Table continuous drive current of the motor A A08 Thermal time constant 0 5 to 75 0 0 1 min Y Y 5 0 A09 DC Braking 2 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 Hz Y Ys 0 0 Braking starting frequency A10 Braking level 0 to 100 1 Y N 0 A11 Braking time 0 00 Disable 0 01 s Y x 0 00 0 01 to 30 00 A12 Starting Frequency 2 0 1 to 60 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 1 0 A13 Load Selection 0 Variable torque load N y 1 Auto Torque Boost 1 Constant torque load Auto Energy Saving Operation 2 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC A14 Control Mode Selection 0 V f control with slip compensation N hA 0 2 inactive 1 Dynamic torque vector control 2 V f control with slip compensation active A16
112. 88 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 9 110 65 97 65 4x5x7 Elongated hole 130 Power Dimensions supply Inverter type mm voltage D D1 D2 Three FRNO010C2S 20 phase 200 V FRN0012C2S 20 139 75 Three FRN0005C2S 40 phase 64 400 V FRN0007C2S 40 Single phase FRN0010C2S 70 149 85 200 V Prae py Inverter type bed a FRN0020C2S 20 s FRNOO11C2S 40 pera FRNOO12C2S 70 Note A box O in the above tables replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V series of inverters it replaces A or U Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 10 8 5 Protective Functions Not applicable LED Alarm Name Description Monitor output displays 30A B C Overcurrent Stops the inverter output to protect the Yes protection inverter from an overcurrent resulting from Short circuit overload protection Stops the inverter output to protect the Ground fault inverter from an overcurrent due to a short During running 7 protection circuit in the output circuit at constant Stops the inverter output to protect the speed inverter from an overcurrent due to a ground fault in the output circuit This protectio
113. 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 3 2 The motor rotates but the speed does not increase Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The maximum frequency Check the data of function code F03 or A01 Maximum frequency currently specified was too low gt Correct the F03 or A01 data The data of frequency limiter currently specified was too low Check the data of function code F15 Frequency limiter High gt Correct the F15 data The reference frequency currently specified was too low Check the signals for the frequency command entered via the analog input terminals using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Increase the reference frequency gt Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers signal converters switches or relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires to terminals 13 12 11 and C1 correctly A frequency command e g multistep frequency or via communications link with higher priority than the one expected was active and its reference frequency was too low Check the data of the relevant function codes and what frequency commands are being received through Menu 1 Data Setting Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad referring to the block diagram of the drive frequency generator Refer to the FRENIC
114. 9 1 5 5 77 3 46 5 39 9 22 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 8 80 5 58 5 39 9 12 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 14 26 8 82 4 79 9 30 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 21 25 12 65 4 34 11 75 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 26 92 14 38 3 63 11 85 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 38 87 20 36 3 04 12 14 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 50 14 23 00 2 58 12 98 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 60 45 24 61 2 29 13 01 0 87 22 00 to 29 99 22 70 40 28 87 2 12 12 56 0 90 30 00 30 97 54 44 74 2 09 11 86 0 80 400 V class series for Europe version FRN C2S 4E 400 V 50 Hz rated voltage base frequency Fuji standard 8 series Motor capacity Nominal Rated N zlgad R X Rated slip kW applied current current RA RA frequency motor A A Hz P02 A16 kw P03 A17 P06 A20 P07 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 22 0 20 13 79 11 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 35 0 27 12 96 12 67 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 65 0 53 12 95 12 92 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 15 0 83 10 20 13 66 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 80 1 15 8 67 10 76 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 10 1 51 6 55 11 21 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 60 2 43 6 48 10 97 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 7 50 3 84 5 79 11 25 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 50 5 50 5 28 14 31 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 75 14 50 6 25 4 50 14 68 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 21 00 8 85 3 78 15 09 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 27 50 10 00 3 25 16 37 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 34 00 10 70 2 92 16 58 0 87 22 00 to 29 99 22 39 00 12 60 2 70 16 00 0 90 30 00 30 54 00 19 50 2 64 14 96
115. After initialization reconfigure the necessary function codes one by one checking the running status of the motor 6 2 2 Problems with inverter settings 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 No power supplied to Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage the inverter unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 The power for the control Check if the jumper bar has been removed between terminals P1 PCB did not reach a and P or if there is poor contact between the jumper bar and the sufficiently high level terminals gt Mount a jumper bar or DC reactor between terminals P1 and P For poor contact tighten up the screws Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 8 2 The desired menu is not displayed Possible Causes 1 The menu display mode is not selected appropriately Check and Measures Check the data of function code E52 Keypad Menu display mode gt Change the E52 data so that the desired menu appears 3 Data of function codes cannot be changed Possible Causes 1 An
116. Check and Suggested Measures Check the operation of external equipment gt Remove the cause of the alarm that occurred 2 Wrong connection or poor contact in external alarm signal wiring Check if the external alarm signal wiring is correctly connected to the terminal to which the THR terminal command Enable external alarm trip has been assigned Any of E01 through E03 E98 and E99 should be set to 9 gt Connect the external alarm signal wire correctly 3 Incorrect setting of function code data Check if the THR terminal command Enable external alarm trip has been assigned to an unavailable terminal with E01 through E03 E98 or E99 gt Correct the assignment Check whether the normal negative logic of the external signal matches that of the THR terminal command specified by any of E01 through E03 E98 and E99 gt Ensure the matching of the normal negative logic 8 G4 Motor protection PTC thermistor Problem Possible Causes 1 The temperature around the motor exceeded the motor s specification range Temperature of the motor has risen abnormally What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the temperature around the motor gt Lower the temperature 2 Cooling system for the motor defective Check if the cooling system of the motor is operating normally gt Repair or replace the cooling system of the motor 3 Load was too heavy Measure the output c
117. Current Limiter Mode selection Level E Mode selection F43 F43 selects the motor running state in which the current limiter will be active Data for Running states that enable the current limiter F43 During acceleration Disable During constant speed Disable During deceleration Disable Disable Enable Disable Enable Enable Disable E Level F44 F44 specifies the operation level at which the output current limiter becomes activated in ratio to the inverter rating Note e If an excessive load is applied when the current limiter operation level is set extremely low the inverter will rapidly lower its output frequency This may cause an overvoltage trip or dangerous turnover of the motor rotation due to undershooting Since the current limit operation with F43 and F44 is performed by software it may cause a delay in control If you need a quick response specify a current limit operation by hardware H12 1 at the same time Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 42 F50 F51 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Braking Resistor Discharging capability and Allowable average loss A braking resistor can be mounted on inverters of 0 4 kW or above These function codes specify the electronic thermal overload protection feature for the braking resistor Set F50 and F51 data to the discharging capabili
118. E A 6 Rated capacity printed on the Applicable motor rated capacity nameplate of the motor Rated current of applicable motor Motor parameter Rated current 1 Motor 0 Motor characteristics 0 characteri Motor selection Fuji standard 8 series stics 1 motors HP rating motors DIAG N Maximum System design values WT 60 0 Hz 60 0 Hz frequency Fora test driving of the motor increase values Acceleration time so that they are longer y i than your system design values If the set time is short the oe ume inverter may not start 6 00 s running the motor 6 00 s _ In any of the following cases the default settings may not produce the best results for auto Gip torque boost auto energy saving automatic deceleration auto search for idling motor speed slip compensation or torque vector since the standard settings of motor parameters for Fuji motors are not applicable Tune the motor parameters according to the procedure given below e The motor to be driven is not a Fuji product or is a non standard product e The cabling between the motor and the inverter is long Areactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter A codes are used to specify the data for motor 2 Use them if necessary Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 2 lt Tuning procedure gt 1 Preparation Chec
119. E Transit to Programming Mode You can also go back to Programming mode by pressing the ree amp keys simultaneously while the alarm is displayed and modify the setting of function codes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 30 Figure 3 11 summarizes the possible transitions between different menu items _ Running Mode i Alarm occurs sre T Current alarm code E g on a i A we k Latest alarm coda Eg oue 2nd latest alarm code Eg 3rd latest alarm code a List of alarm codes Progra mming 4 Swatches at app ox Output frequency Jeeson meva s A e OOO a EL o Mode Tee hem Ne S00 Ken No Hert No Soe Ewilehes al appro Gulput current Tstpund inlerna ea Swilches al aparos Rung Status 1 scp00d inlenvals x Same as above Same as above Same as above Running status info at the lime an alarm occurred Figure 3 11 Alarm Mode Status Transition Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 31 Chapter 4 RUNNING THE MOTOR 4 1 Test Run 4 1 1 Checking prior to powering on Check the following prior to powering on the inverter 1 Check the wiring to the power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L and L2 N and inverter output terminals U V and W Also check that the grounding wires are co
120. EC 61800 5 1 2007 under application Enclosure IP20 IEC 60529 1989 UL open type UL50 Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Mass kg y 0 6 0 7 t 1 7 5 2 5 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 Refers to the rated capacity assuming the rated output voltage as 220 V 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 The load shall be reduced so that the continuous operating current is the rated current in parentheses or less if the carrier frequency is set to 3 kHz or above or the ambient temperature exceeds 40 C Max voltage V Min voltage V 3 phase average voltage V DC braking 5 Interphase voltage unbalance x 67 Refer to IEC 61800 3 2004 If this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Refers to the estimated value to apply when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA inverter capacity x 10 when the inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and the inverter is connected to the X 5 power supply 7 Refers to the value to apply when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Refers to the average braking torque to apply when the motor running alone decelerates from 60 Hz with the AVR control being OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 9 Available only for induction motor drive Note A box 0O in the above table replaces A or U depending on the shipping destination Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiauto
121. ENIC Mini series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU ee 11 6 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Preface Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Mini series of inverters This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor and three phase permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with proper han dling and operation of this product Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Have this manual delivered to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded Listed below are the other materials related to the use of the FRENIC Mini Read them in conjunction with this manual as necessary e FRENIC Mini User s Manual 24A7 E 0023 e RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448 Catalog 24A1 E 0011 The materials are subject to change without notice Be sure to obtain the latest editions for use Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and Gen eral purpose Appliances Fuji three phase 200 V class series of inverters with a capacity of 3 7 4 0 kW or less single phase 200 V class series with 2 2 kW or less and single phase 100 V class series with 0 75 kW or less were once subject to the Japanese Guideline for S
122. FF status of each terminal The default setting is normal logic system Active ON So explanations that follow are given in normal ACAUTION In the case of digital input you can assign commands to the switching means for the run command and its operation and the reference frequency e g SS1 SS2 SS4 SS8 Hz2 Hz1 Hz PID IVS and LE Be aware that switching any of such signals may cause a sudden start running or an abrupt change in speed An accident or physical injury may result Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 44 Function code data Active ON Active OFF 0 1000 1001 1002 1003 Ss8 1004 Select ACC DEC time RT1 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 1007 Coast to a stop BX 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 Enable external alarm trip THR 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Enable DC braking DCBRK 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 1020 Cancel PID control Hz PID 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 LE 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD Run forward Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals FWD by E98 and E99 Run reverse Exclusively assigned to FWD and REV terminals
123. FO Instruction Manual FRENIC Mini Three phase 200 V series FRNOO01 to 0020C2S 20 Three phase 400 V series FRN0002 to 0011C2S 40 Single phase 200 V series FRNO001 to 0012C2S 70 ACAUTION Thank you for purchasing our FRENIC Mini series of inverters e This product is designed to drive a three phase induction motor and three phase permanent magnet synchronous motor Read through this instruction manual and be familiar with the handling procedure for correct use Improper handling might result in incorrect operation a short life or even a failure of this product as well as the motor Deliver this manual to the end user of this product Keep this manual in a safe place until this product is discarded For instructions on how to use an optional device refer to the instruction and installation manuals for that optional device a a 8S l u T F Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Copyright 2013 Fuji Electric Co Ltd All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric Co Ltd All products and company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders The information contained herein is subject to change without prior notice for improvement Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautoma
124. H30 Run forward FWD Function code data 98 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the forward direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop L This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 m Run reverse REV Function code data 99 Turning this terminal command ON runs the motor in the reverse direction turning it OFF decelerates it to stop LO This terminal command can be assigned only by E98 or E99 E20 Terminal Y1 Function E27 Terminal 30A B C Function Relay output E20 and E27 assign output signals listed on the next page to general purpose programmable output terminals Y1 and 30A B C These function codes can also switch the logic system between normal and negative to define the property of those output terminals so that the inverter logic can interpret either the ON or OFF status of each terminal as active The factory default settings are Active ON Terminal Y1 is a transistor output and terminals 30A B C are relay contact outputs In normal logic if an alarm occurs the relay will be energized so that 30A and 30C will be closed and 30B and 30C opened In negative logic the relay will be deenergized so that 30A and 30C will be opened and 30B and 30C closed This may be useful for the implementation of failsafe power systems Note When a negative logic is employed all output signals are active e g an alarm would be recognized while the inver
125. H42 and H47 Check whether there has been any mistake in operation and conduct the measurement again To change the settings back to the state at the time of factory shipment set H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0002 the original values will be restored Hereafter each time the inverter is switched OFF the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor is automatically measured if the above condition is met Note The condition given above produces a rather large measurement error If this mode gives you a lifetime alarm set H98 Maintenance operation back to the default setting Bit 3 Specify service life criteria for replacing the DC link bus capacitor 0 and conduct the measurement under the condition at the time of factory shipment Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information in Programming mode and check the cumulative run time of the electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards This value is calculated from the cumulative total number of hours a voltage has been applied on the electrolytic capacitor The value is displayed on the LED monitor in units of 1000 hours Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 5 Cooling fan Select Menu 5 Maintenance Information and check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan The inverter accumulates hours for which the cooling fan has run
126. Holding time 0 1 to 60 0 0 1 Hz 1 0 0 00 to 10 00 0 01 0 00 F25 Stop Frequency 0 1 to 60 0 0 1 Hz 0 2 5 38 F26 Motor Sound Carrier frequency Tone F27 0 75 to 16 kHz lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt ACU 2 E15 Level 0 Inactive Level 1 Level 3 5 39 F30 Analog Output FMA Voltage adjustment F31 Function 0 1 2 Level 2 3 0 to 300 Y 100 Select a function to be monitored from the followings 0 Output frequency 1 before slip compensation 1 Output frequency 2 after slip compensation 2 Output current 3 Output voltage 6 Input power 7 PID feedback amount PV 9 DC link bus voltage Calibration PID command SV PID output MV 5 40 F37 Load Selection Auto Torque Boost Auto Energy Saving Operation 1 0 Variable torque load 1 Constant torque load 2 Auto torque boost 3 Auto energy saving operation Variable torque load during ACC DEC 4 Auto energy saving operation Constant torque load during ACC DEC 5 Auto energy saving operation Auto torque boost during ACC DEC 5 26 F39 Stop Frequency Holding Time 0 00 to 10 00 0 01 0 00 5 38 F42 Control Mode Selection 1 0 V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control 2 V f control with slip compensation active
127. Motor 1 Selection P99 specifies the type of motor 1 to be used Data for P99 Motor type Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard IM 8 series Motor characteristics 1 HP rating IM Typical in North America Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard IM 6 series Other motors IM Other motors PMSM Fuji standard PMSM without sensor GNB series Automatic control such as auto torque boost and auto energy saving or electronic thermal overload protection for motor uses the motor parameters and characteristics To match the property of a control system with that of the motor select characteristics of the motor and set H03 data Data Initialization to 2 to initialize the motor parameters stored in the inverter The initialization automatically updates the P03 and P06 to P12 data and the constants used inside the inverter According to the motor model set the P99 data as shown below For Fuji standard IM 8 series Current standard induction motors P99 0 e For Fuji standard IM 6 series Conventional standard induction motors P99 3 For other manufacturers IM or model unknown IM P99 4 For PMSM P99 20 or 21 to be selected after consultation with motor manufacturers Cote When P99 4 the inverter runs following the motor characteristics of Fuji ots standard IM 8 series When P99 1 the inverter applies to the characteristics of HP rating IM Typical in North America Phone
128. N and check that the reference frequency 7 77 Hz is blinking on the LED monitor TORT 2 Set a low reference frequency such as 5 Hz using CUS keys Check that the frequency is blinking on the LED monitor 3 Press the fut key to start running the motor in the forward direction Check that the reference frequency is displayed on the LED monitor 4 To stop the motor press the ee key lt Check points during a test run gt e Check that the motor is running in the forward direction e Check for smooth rotation without motor humming or excessive vibration e Check for smooth acceleration and deceleration When no abnormality is found press the fant key again to start driving the motor then increase the reference frequency using Se keys Check the above points again If any problem is found modify the function code data again as described below 4 2 Operation After confirming that the inverter normally drives the motor in a test run make mechanical connections connections to the machine system and electrical connections wiring and cabling and configure the necessary function codes properly before starting a production run Note Depending on the production run conditions further adjustments may be required such as adjustments of torque boost F09 A05 acceleration time F07 E10 and deceleration time F08 E11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation ne
129. Note Specifying a too low carrier frequency will cause the output current waveform to have a large amount of ripples As a result the motor loss increases causing the motor temperature to rise Furthermore the large amount of ripples tends to cause a current limiting alarm When the carrier frequency is set to 1 kHz or below therefore reduce the load so that the inverter output current comes to be 80 or less of the rated current When a high carrier frequency is specified the temperature of the inverter may rise due to an ambient temperature rise or an increase of the load If it happens the inverter automatically decreases the carrier frequency to prevent the inverter uit overload alarm i 4 With consideration for motor noise the automatic reduction of carrier frequency can be disabled Refer to the description of H98 Em Motor sound Tone F27 F27 changes the motor running sound tone This setting is effective when the carrier frequency set to function code F26 is 7 kHz or lower Changing the tone level may reduce the high and harsh running noise from the motor Note If the sound level is set too high the output current may become unstable or mechanical vibration and noise may increase Also these function codes may not be very effective for certain types of motor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 39 F30 Analog Output FMA Voltage adjustment F
130. O Checking on the keypad gt Release the coast to stop command setting 10 Broken wire incorrect connection or poor contact with the motor Check the wiring Measure the output current gt Repair the wires to the motor or replace them 11 Overload Measure the output current gt Reduce the load In winter the load tends to increase Check that any mechanical brake is activated gt Release the mechanical brake if any 12 Torque generated by the motor was insufficient Check that the motor starts running if the value of torque boost F09 A05 is increased gt Increase the value of torque boost F09 A05 and try to run the motor Check the data of function codes F04 F05 H50 through H53 A02 and A03 gt Change the V f pattern to match the motor s characteristics Check that the motor switching signal selecting motor 2 or 1 is correct and the data of function codes matches each motor gt Correct the motor switching signal gt Modify the function code data to match the connected motor Check whether the reference frequency signal is below the slip compensated frequency of the motor gt Change the reference frequency signal so that it becomes higher than the slip compensated frequency of the motor 13 Wrong connection or poor contact of DC reactor DCR Check the wiring gt Connect the DCR correctly Repair or replace DCR wires Phone 800
131. OFF The minimum ON duration is 100 ms Refer to the description of E34 m Under PID control PID CTL Function code data 43 This output signal comes ON when PID control is enabled Cancel PID control Hz PID OFF and a run command is ON Refer to the description of J01 m Motor stopped due to slow flowrate under PID control PID STP Function code data 44 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is stopped by the slow flowrate stop function under PID control Refer to the descriptions of J15 through J17 Note When PID control is enabled the inverter may stop due to the slow flowrate stop function or other reasons with the PID CTL signal being ON As long as the PID CTL signal is ON PID control is effective so the inverter may abruptly resume its operation depending on the PID feedback value A WARNING When PID control is enabled even if the inverter stops its output during operation because of sensor signals or other reasons operation will resume automatically Design your machinery so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 55 m Switched to motor 2 SWM2 Function code data 49 This output signal comes ON when motor 2 is selected with the M2 M1 terminal command assigned to a digital input terminal For details refer to the descriptions of E0
132. P E1 Extension cable for remote operation The extension cable connects the remote keypad with the inverter for remote operation It is also used for connection of a USB RS 485 converter Three lengths are available 5 m 3m and 1m USB RS 485 converter A converter is used to easily connect the RS 485 communications port to a USB port ona PC Products supplied by System Sacom Sales Corporation are recommended Inverter loader software Windows based inverter loader software that makes it easy to configure function code data via the GUI graphical user interface Other peripheral equipment Surge absorbers A surge absorber suppresses surge currents and noise from the power lines to ensure effective protection of your power system from the malfunctioning of the magnetic contactors mini relays and timers Surge killers Asurge killer eliminates surge currents induced by lightening and noise from the power supply lines Use of a surge killer is effective in preventing the electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Arresters An arrester suppresses surge currents and noise invaded from the power supply lines Use of an arrester is effective in preventing electronic equipment including inverters from damage or malfunctioning caused by such surges and or noise Frequency meter Displays the frequency in accordance with signal o
133. SPH S80 480 SOHe60Hs 5 94 TYPE FRNODOSR29 4E SER No WOQAT2IA0001 AA OUTPUT 2PH 1 5k a80 4g0V 1 400H2 4 34 159 Imn BERHO W334 129A0001RA WP a Main Nameplate b Sub Nameplate Figure 1 1 Nameplates TYPE Type of inverter Code Senes name FRN FRENIC series FRN 0005 C25 4E Naminal applied Cade motor cureent a pa ee Manua pog 18 sia Englisl node 4 c China Chinese uggs 4 3 E EWweEnglish coor 6 3 u USA English ae ue Code Power supply voltage 2 Three phase 200 Y Code Application range 4 Three phase 400 y Compact 7 Single phase 200 W Code Geveloped inverter sengs Code Enclosure 2 z 5 Standard IP20 SOURCE Number of input phases three phase 3PH single phase 1PH input voltage input frequency input current OUTPUT Number of output phases rated output capacity rated output voltage output frequency range rated output current and overload capacity SER No Product number Manufacturing date W33A123A0001AA 320 L Production week This indicates the week number that is numbered from 1st week of January The 1st week of January is indicated as 01 Production year Last digit of year If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product contact your Fuji Electric representative Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 1 1 2 External Views 1 External views Control cir
134. TION OF DC REACTOR DCRs This chapter describes a DC reactor that suppresses input harmonic component current Chapter 11 COMPLIANCE WITH STANDARDS This chapter describes standards with which the FRENIC Mini series of inverters comply Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xiv Icons The following icons are used throughout this manual No 5 This icon indicates information which if not heeded can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency as well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents Tip This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations QJ This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net XV Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 Acceptance Inspection Unpack the package and check that 1 An inverter and instruction manual this manual are contained in the package 2 The inverter has not been damaged during transportation there should be no dents or parts missing 3 The inverter is the model you ordered You can check the model name and specifications on the main nameplate Main and sub nameplates are attached to the inverter and are located as shown on the next page FO Fuji Electric ES TE FRNOQOSC 28 46 er BOQURCE
135. This always outputs 10 VDC calibration FMA function 00 of the feedback amount Calibration PID command Command value under PID SV control Output level of the PID PID output MV controller under PID control Frequency command 00 of the PID command value Maximum frequency F03 A01 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 40 F42 Control Mode Selection 1 F42 specifies the control mode of the inverter to control a motor Data for F42 Control mode V f control with slip compensation inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensation active V f control for PMSM drive E V f control In this control the inverter controls a motor by the voltage and frequency according to the V f pattern specified by function codes E Slip compensation Applying any load to an induction motor causes a rotational slip due to the motor characteristics decreasing the motor rotation The inverter s slip compensation facility first presumes the slip value of the motor based on the motor torque generated and raises the output frequency to compensate for the decrease in motor rotation This prevents the motor from decreasing the rotation due to the slip That is this facility is effective for improving the motor speed control accuracy The compensation value is specified by combination of function codes P
136. Y1 and Y1E is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Digital input circuit specification 4 lt Cantral circu Pioatoceupler Current A yt fay Sito Soy J 1E Transistor output Figure 2 9 shows examples of connection between the control circuit and a PLC Chote Check the polarity of the external power inputs When connecting a control relay first connect a surge absorbing diode across the coil of the relay Transistor Power source of 24 VDC to be fed to the transistor output circuit load 50 output mA at maximum power To enable the source it is necessary to short circuit between terminals Y1E and CM Can also be used as a 24 VDC power source Transistor Common terminal for transistor output signal output This terminal is electrically Isolated from terminals CM and 11 common Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 16 Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued circuit Functions C Tip O bB Connecting programmable controller PLC to terminal Y1 Figure 2 9 shows two examples of circuit connection between the transistor output of the inverter s control circuit and a PLC In example a the input circuit of the PLC serves as a sink for the control circuit whereas in example b
137. a magnetic flux in the motor F24 specifies the holding time for the starting frequency To stabilize the motor speed at the stop of the motor F39 specifies the holding time for the stop frequency Note If the starting frequency is lower than the stop frequency the inverter will not output any power as long as the reference frequency does not exceed the stop frequency Output frequency Starting Stop frequency 1 frequency Holding time Holding time F24 F38 Starting ui w Slop frequency 11 1 i 1 frequency i to F25 F23 Tima Invertar Qut of running P Out of cunning running state Gate OFF In running Gate ON Gate OFF i Time Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 38 F26 F27 Motor Sound Carrier frequency and tone m Motor sound Carrier frequency F26 F26 controls the carrier frequency so as to reduce an audible noise generated by the motor or electromagnetic noise from the inverter itself and to decrease a leakage current from the main output secondary wirings Carrier frequency 0 75 to 16 kHz Motor sound noise emission High lt gt Low Motor temperature due to harmonics components High lt gt Low Ripples in output current waveform Large lt gt Small Leakage current Low lt gt High Electromagnetic noise emission Low lt gt High Inverter loss Low lt gt High
138. a thyristor converter is activated a surge momentary large increase in the voltage or current may be caused in the input power gt Install a DC reactor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 11 Possible Causes 3 The specified deceleration time was too short for the moment of inertia of the load What to Check and Suggested Measures Recalculate the deceleration torque based on the moment of inertia of the load and the deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 gt Enable the automatic deceleration anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 or deceleration characteristics H71 1 gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 A03 to 0 to improve the braking capability 4 The specified acceleration time was too short Check if the overvoltage alarm occurs after rapid acceleration gt Increase the acceleration time F07 E10 gt Select the S curve pattern H07 5 Braking load was too heavy Compare the braking torque of the load with that of the inverter gt Set the rated voltage at base frequency F05 A03 to 0 to improve the braking capability 6 Malfunction caused by noise 3 Undervoltage Problem Possible Causes 1 Amomentary power failure occurred Check if the DC link bus voltage was below the protective level when the overvoltage alarm occurred
139. age gt If the ripple is large raise the inverter capacity 5 Single phase voltage was input to the three phase input inverter Note Check the inverter type gt Apply three phase power The FRENIC Mini of three phase input cannot be driven by single phase power supply The input phase loss protection can be disabled with the function code H98 Protection Maintenance Function Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 13 5 4 Output phase loss Problem Possible Causes 1 Inverter output wires are broken Output phase loss occurred What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the output current gt Replace the output wires 2 The motor winding is broken Measure the output current gt Replace the motor 3 Screws on the main circuit power input terminals are loose Check if the screws on the inverter output terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 4 Asingle phase motor has been connected gt Single phase motors cannot be used Note that the FRENIC Mini only drives three phase induction motors 6 J Heat sink overheat Problem Possible Causes 1 Temperature around the inverter exceeded the inverter s specification range Temperature around the heat sink has risen abnormally What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure th
140. ails refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual 24A7 E 0023 Chapter 6 SELECTING PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT Name of peripheral Function and application equipment Molded case MCCBs are designed to protect the power circuits between the power control circuit breaker board and inverter s main terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase MCCB power L1 L and L2 N for single phase power from overload or short circuit Residual current which in turn prevents secondary disasters caused by the inverter operated malfunctioning protective device RCDs ELCBs function in the same way as MCCBs Use the MCCBs and RCD RCDs ELCBs that satisfy the recommended rated current listed below Earth leakage circuit breaker Power APPlicable Recommended rated current A of ELCB motor MCCB and RCD ELCB ae supply rating Inverter type with overcurrent voltage kW w DC reactor w o DC reactor protection 0 1 FRNO001C2S 20 0 2 FRNO002C2S 20 5 es Three 0 4 FRN0004C2S 20 z phase 0 75 FRN0006C2S 20 10 S 200V 15 FRN0010C2S 20 is 15 2 2 2 FRN0012C2S 20 20 37 FRN0020C2S 20 20 30 6 0 4 FRNOO02C2S 40 5 2 0 75 FRN0004C2S 40 z hess 1 5 FRN0005C2S 40 10 phase 400V 2 2 FRN0007C2S 40 15 3 7 4 0 FRNOO11C2S 40 10 20 0 1 FRNO001C2S 70 5 0 2 FRNO002C2S 70 5 RATA 0 4 FRN0004C2S 70 10 S00 y _0 75 FRN0006C2S 70 10 15 1 5 FRN0010C2S 70 15 20 2 2 FRN0012C2S 70 20 30 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the
141. alog setting 2 of max freq at 25 C temperature drift 0 2 of max freq at 25 10 C e Keypad setting 0 01 of max freq at 25 C temperature drift 0 01 of max freq at 25 10 C Frequency setting resolution Analog setting 1 1000 of maximum frequency e Keypad setting 0 01 Hz 99 99 Hz or less 0 1 Hz 100 0 to 400 0 Hz e Link setting 1 20000 of maximum frequency or 0 01 Hz fixed Control Control system Driving induction motor IM e V f control slip compensation auto torque boost e Dynamic torque vector control automatic energy saving control Driving permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM without speed position sensor 2 Speed control range 10 or more of the base frequency Voltage frequency characteristics 200 V e Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and series at maximum output frequency 80 to 240 V The AVR control 1 can be turned ON or OFF Non linear V f 1 setting 2 points Free voltage 0 to 240 V and frequency 0 to 400 Hz can be set 400 V series Possible to set output voltage at base frequency and at maximum output frequency 160 to 500 V The AVR control 1 can be turned ON or OFF Non linear V f 1 setting 2 points Free voltage 0 to 500 V and frequency 0 to 400 Hz can be set Torque boost 1 e Auto torque boost For constant torque load Manual torque boost Torque boost value can be set between 0 0 and 20 0
142. an Refer Code Name Data setting range pe Unit ne one San o running page E60 Built in Potentiometer 0 None 1 N Y 0 5 59 Function selection 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 2 Auxiliary frequency command 2 3 PID process command 1 E61 Terminal 12 Extended Selecting function code data assigns the N Y 0 Function corresponding function to terminals 12 and C1 as listed below E62 Terminal C1 Extended 0 None N Y 0 Function 1 Auxiliary frequency command 1 2 Auxiliary frequency command 2 3 PID process command 1 5 PID feedback value E98 Terminal FWD Function Selecting function code data assigns the N Y 98 5 44 corresponding function to terminals FWD and REV as listed below E99 Terminal REV Function 0 1000 Select multistep frequency SS1 N Y 99 1 1001 Select multistep frequency SS2 2 1002 Select multistep frequency SS4 3 1003 Select multistep frequency SS8 4 1004 Select ACC DEC time RT1 6 1006 Enable 3 wire operation HLD 7 1007 Coast to a stop BX 8 1008 Reset alarm RST 9 1009 Enable external alarm trip THR 10 1010 Ready for jogging JOG 11 1011 Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 12 1012 Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 13 Enable DC braking DCBRK 17 1017 UP Increase output frequency UP 18 1018 DOWN Decrease output frequency DOWN 19 1019 Enable data change with keypad WE KP 20 1020 Cancel PID
143. asures against the high frequency current component Fuji SG and EG series An external thermal relay 1 Decrease the carrier frequency was activated 2 Increase the settling current of the thermal relay 3 Use the electronic thermal overload protection built in the inverter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 20 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components 7 segment As shown in the figure at right the Program Reset key LED monitor keypad consists of a four digit 7 segment LED monitor a potenti ometer POT and six keys The keypad allows you to start and stop the motor monitor running status configure the function code data check I O signal states and display maintenance information and alarm information RUN key Potentiometer Function Data key Downkey Up key STOP key Table 3 1 Names and Functions of Keypad Components Monitor Potentiometer Functions and Keys Four digit 7 segment LED monitor which displays the following according to the operation modes m In Running mode Running status information e g output frequency nnn GGU U current and voltage E m In Programming mode Menus function codes and their data m In Alarm mode Alarm code which identifies the error factor if the protective function is activated Potentiometer POT which
144. ative logic for programmable I O terminals The negative logic signaling system can be used for digital input terminals and transistor output terminals by setting the function code data specifying the properties for those terminals Negative logic refers to the inverted ON OFF logical value 1 true 0 false state of input or output signal An active ON signal the function takes effect if the terminal is short circuited in the normal logic system is functionally equivalent to active OFF signal the function takes effect if the terminal is opened in the negative logic system An active ON signal can be switched to active OFF signal and vice versa with the function code data setting To set the negative logic system for an input or output terminal enter data of 1000s by adding 1000 to the data for the normal logic in the corresponding function code Example Coast to a stop command BX assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X3 using any of function codes E01 through E03 Function code data BX 7 Turning BX ON causes the motor to coast to a stop Active ON 1007 Turning BX OFF causes the motor to coast to a stop Active OFF m Limitation of data displayed on the LED monitor Only four digits can be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor If you enter more than 4 digits of data valid for a function code any digits after the 4th digit of the set data will not be displayed however they will be processed correctly
145. attempt was made to change function code data that cannot be changed when the inverter is running What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if the inverter is running with Menu 3 Drive Monitoring using the keypad and then confirm whether the data of the function codes can be changed when the motor is running referring to the function code tables gt Stop the motor then change the data of the function codes S The data of the function codes is protected Check the data of function code F00 Data protection gt Change the F00 data from Enable data protection 1 or 3 to Disable data protection 0 or 2 The WE KP terminal command Enable data change with keypad is not entered though it has been assigned to a digital input terminal Check the data of function codes E01 through E03 E98 and E99 and the input signals with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a WE KP command through a digital input terminal The key was not pressed Check whether you have pressed the E gt function code data key after changing the gt Press the GS key after changing the function code data 5 The data of function Either one of the FWD and REV terminal commands is ON codes F02 E01 through E03 E98 and E99 gt Turn OFF both FWD and REV cannot be changed 6 The DC link bus voltage Using Menu 5 Maintenance Information on the keypad check has dropped
146. below inverters marked with CE are considered as compliant with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC A CAUTION 1 The ground terminal G should always be connected to the ground Do not use only a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB as the sole method of electric shock protection Be sure to use ground wires whose size is greater than power supply lines With overcurrent protection 2 When used with the inverter a molded case circuit breaker MCCB resid ual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB or magnetic contactor MC should conform to the EN or IEC standards 3 When you use a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB for protection from electric shock in direct or indirect contact power lines or nodes be sure to install type B of RCD ELCB on the input primary of the inverter if the power source is three phase 200 400 V For single phase 200 V power supplies use type A When you use no RCD ELCB take any other protective measure that isolates the electric equipment from other equipment on the same power supply line using double or reinforced insulation or that isolates the power supply lines connected to the electric equipment using an isolation transformer 4 The inverter should be used in an environment that does not exceed Pollution Degree 2 requirements If the environment conforms t
147. blocked What to Check and Suggested Measures Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 6 Service life of cooling fan has expired or cooling fan is faulty Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 5 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan 7 The wires to the motor are too long causing a large leakage current from them 12 Memory error Measure the leakage current gt Insert an output circuit filter OFL Problem Error occurred in writing data to the inverter memory Possible Causes 1 During writing of function code data especially during initialization or data copying the inverter was shut down so that the voltage to the control PCB has dropped What to Check and Suggested Measures Initialize the function code data with H03 1 After initialization check if pressing the ey resets the alarm gt Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation BS Inverter affected by strong electrical noise when writing data especially initializing or copying data Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implement
148. ce item then press the ee key The data of the corresponding maintenance item appears 5 Press the ee key to return to the list of maintenance items Press the se key again to return to the menu Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 23 LED Monitor shows EE ai LAET Table 3 15 Maintenance Display Items Contents Cumulative run time Description Shows the cumulative power ON time of the inverter Unit 1 000 hours When the total ON time is less than 10 000 hours display 0 001 to 9 999 data is shown in units of one hour When the total time is 10 000 hours or more display 10 00 to 65 53 it is shown in units of 10 hours When the total time exceeds 65535 hours the display will be reset to 0 and the count will start again 571 DC link bus Shows the DC link bus voltage of the inverter aS voltage Unit V volts 5 oF Max temperature Shows the maximum temperature of the heat sink for every hour ine of heat sink Unit C SY Max effective Shows the maximum effective current for every hour es current Unit A amperes Shows the current capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor based on A capacitance of the capacitance when shipping as 100 Refer to Chapter 7 9 05 the DC link bus MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION for details capacitor Unit Shows the cumulative time during which a voltage is applied t
149. ch can shorten the inverter s service life Also use a DCR when there are thyristor driven loads or when phase advancing capacitors are being turned on off 2 For supplied power factor reformation harmonic component reduction Generally a capacitor is used to reform the power factor of the load however it cannot be used in a system that includes an inverter Using a DCR increases the reactance of inverter s power source so as to decrease harmonic components on the power source lines and reform the power factor of inverter Using a DCR reforms the input power factor to approximately 90 to 95 At the time of shipping a jumper bar is connected across the Cote terminals P1 and P on the terminal block Remove the jumper bar when connecting a DCR Main option Output circuit filters Include an OFL in the inverter power output circuit to OFLs 1 Suppress the voltage fluctuation at the motor input terminals This protects the motor from insulation damage caused by the application of high voltage surge currents by the 400 V class of inverters 2 Suppress leakage current from the power output secondary lines due to harmonic components This reduces the leakage current when the motor is hooked by long power feed lines It is recommended that the length of the power feed line be kept to less than 400 m 3 Minimize emission and or induction noise issued from the power output secondary lines OFLs are effective
150. chinery is hunting due to vibration caused by low rigidity of the load Or the current is irregularly oscillating due to special motor parameters Once cancel all the automatic control systems auto torque boost auto energy saving operation overload prevention control current limiter automatic deceleration anti regenerative control and slip compensation and then check that the motor vibration comes to a stop gt Cancel the functions causing the vibration gt Readjust the output current fluctuation damping gain H80 A41 Check that the motor vibration is suppressed if you decrease the level of F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency or set F27 Motor sound Tone to 0 gt Decrease the carrier frequency F26 or set the tone to 0 F27 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates Possible Causes 1 The specified carrier frequency is too low What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency and F27 Motor sound Tone gt Increase the carrier frequency F26 gt Change the setting of F27 to appropriate value 2 The ambient temperature of the inverter was too high when automatic lowering of the carrier frequency was enabled by H98 Measure the temperature inside the panel where the inverter is mounted gt If it is over 40 C lower it by improving the ventilation gt Lower the temperature
151. codes for the I O check item list e g 27 Use the wz and we keys to select the desired I O check item then press the Se key g The corresponding I O check data appears For control I O signal terminal and control circuit terminal input under communication control use the wx and Mm keys to select one of the two different display methods 5 Press the ga key to return to the I O check item list Press the ga key again to return to the menu Table 3 12 I O Check Items LED monitor shows Contents Description Shows the ON OFF state of the digital I O terminals Refer to Displaying control I O signal terminals below for details on the display contents Shows the ON OFF state for the digital I O terminals that received a command via RS 485 communica tions Refer to Displaying control I O signal ter minals and Displaying control I O signal termi nals under communication control below for de tails of the item displayed O signals on the contro circuit terminals O signals on the contro circuit terminals under communication control nput voltage on terminal 12 Shows the input voltage on terminal 12 in volts V Shows the input current on terminal C1 in milliam nput current on terminal C1 peres mA Output voltage to analog Shows the output voltage on terminal FMA in volts meters FMA V Displaying control I O signal terminals The status of co
152. commands should be within 100 ms If arun command FWDis entered first the inverter does not jog the motor but runs it ordinarily until the next input of the JOG E Select frequency command 2 1 Hz2 Hz1 Function code data 11 Turning this terminal command ON and OFF switches the frequency command source between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 If no Hz2 Hz1 terminal command is assigned the frequency sourced by F01 takes effect by default Input terminal command Hz2 Hz1 Frequency command source OFF Follow F01 Frequency command 1 ON Follow C30 Frequency command 2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 48 m Select motor 2 motor 1 M2 M1 Function code data 12 Turning this terminal command ON switches from motor 1 to motor 2 Switching is possible only when the inverter is stopped Upon completion of switching the digital terminal output Switched to motor 2 SWM2 assigned to any of terminals Y1 and 30A B C turns ON If no M2 M7 terminal command is assigned motor 1 is selected by default Input terminal command SWM2 status M2 M1 Selecied motor after completion of switching OFF Motor 1 OFF ON Motor 2 ON Switching between motors 1 and 2 automatically switches applicable function codes as listed below The inverter runs the motor with those codes that should be properly configured
153. control Hz PID 21 1021 Switch normal inverse operation IVS 24 1024 Enable communications link via RS 485 LE 33 1033 Reset PID integral and differential components PID RST 34 1034 Hold PID integral component PID HLD 98 Run forward FWD 99 Run reverse REV Setting the value in parentheses shown above assigns a negative logic input Active OFF to a terminal Note that in the case of THR data 1009 is for normal logic Active ON and 9 for negative logic Active OFF Signals having no value in parentheses cannot be used for negative logic Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 9 C codes Control Functions Code Name Data setting range ere Unit ae Rares pi i running page C01 Jump Frequency 1 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y Y 0 0 co2 2 Y Y 0 0 C03 3 Y Y 0 0 C04 Hysteresis width 0 0 to 30 0 0 1 Hz Y W 3 0 C05 Multistep Frequency 1 0 00 to 400 00 2 0 01 Hz Y Y 0 00 C06 2 Y Y 0 00 C07 3 Y Y 0 00 c08 4 Y y 0 00 cog 5 F Y 0 00 C10 6 Y Y 0 00 C11 7 Y Yy 0 00 C12 8 Y Y 0 00 C13 9 Y Y 0 00 C14 10 Y Y 0 00 C15 11 Y Y 0 00 C16 12 Y y 0 00 C17 13 Y Y 0 00 C18 14 Y Y 0 00 C19 15 Y Y 0 00 C20 Jogging Frequ
154. ct values No tuning function is provided F03 Maximum Frequency 1 Hz F04 Base frequency Hz F05 Rated voltage at base frequency V When FO5 0 the inverter acts as 200 400V setting F06 Maximum Output Voltage 1 V P03 Motor rated current A P60 Armature resistance Q P61 d axis inductance mH P62 q axis inductance mH P63 Induced voltage V P90 Overcurrent protection level A If any of P60 P62 and P63 is set to 0 00 the inverter does not start Be sure to set correct values The factory defaults of P60 to P63 are 0 00 If motor parameters are not correct the inverter cannot run normally Set P90 to the value less than the demagnetizing current A failure could occur The carrier frequency F26 should be 2 to 16 kHz Running a PMSM at 0 75 or 1 kHz may result in a failure due to demagnetization The automatic carrier Carrier frequency frequency lowering function at the time of inverter overheat does not work A failure could occur 2nd motor APMSM cannot be driven as the 2nd motor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 78 Item Specifications Linear V f pattern only V f patt A parem The load selection value F37 will be ignored Auto energy saving When driving a PMSM the high efficiency control is always ON Auto tuning A PMSM cannot be tuned Not available for a PMSM The H12 setting will be
155. ction and d judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor as well as specifying the judgment threshold on the life of the DC link bus capacitor in a combination of Bit 0 to Bit 4 Automatic lowering of carrier frequency Bit 0 This function should be used for important machinery that requires keeping the inverter running Even if a heat sink overheat or overload occurs due to excessive load abnormal ambient temperature or cooling system failure enabling this function lowers the carrier frequency to avoid tripping or Li L Note that enabling this function results in increased motor noise Input phase loss protection _17_ Bit 1 Upon detection of an excessive stress inflicted on the apparatus connected to the main circuit due to phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance in the three phase power supplied to the inverter this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm 7 note In configurations where only a light load is driven or a DC reactor is connected phase loss or line to line voltage unbalance may not be detected because of the relatively small stress on the apparatus connected to the main circuit Output phase loss protection 4 7 _ Bit 2 Upon detection of phase loss in the output while the inverter is running this feature stops the inverter and displays an alarm Where a magnetic contactor is installed in the inverter output circuit if the magnetic contactor goes OFF during operati
156. cuit terminal block cover Sub nameplate H Main circuit terminal block cover Main nameplate Control circuit terminal bock cover Figure 1 2 External Views of FRENIC Mini 2 Wiring section Barrier for the RS 485 communications port Control signal cable port 9 L1 R L2 S L3 T U V W grounding wire port PA 4 L1 R L2 S L3 T P1 P N wire port DB U V W grounding wire port Cooling fan a FRNOOO6C2S 20 b FRN0010C2S 20 When connecting the RS 485 communications cable remove the control circuit terminal block cover and cut off the barrier provided in it using nippers Note A box O in the above model names replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U Figure 1 3 Wiring Section 1 3 Transportation When carrying the inverter always support its bottom at the front and rear sides with both hands Do not hold covers or individual parts only You may drop the inverter or break it Avoid applying excessively strong force to the terminal block covers as they are made of plastic and are easily broken Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 2 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 Temporary storage Store the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 1 1 Table 1 1 Environmental Requirements
157. d 30C is closed For example if Y1 is on and 30A is connected to 30C then 7 is displayed on the LED4 to LED1 Table 3 14 presents an example of bit assignment and corresponding hexadecimal display on the 7 segment LED Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 21 Table 3 14 Segment Display for I O Signal Status in Hexadecimal Formai LED No Bit Input terminal Output terminal Binary Hexa decimal See Table 3 11 T3 A ae LaLa monitor LEC4 LEDS LED2 LEDI No corresponding control terminal exists XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to Displaying control I O signal termi nals under communication control Displaying control I O signal terminals under communication control During control via communication input commands sent through the RS 485 communications link can be displayed in two ways display with ON OFF of the LED segment and in hexadecimal format The content to be displayed is basically the same as that for the control I O signal terminal status display however XF XR and RST are added as inputs Note that under communica tions control I O display is in normal logic using the original signals that are not inverted 4 Refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448 for details on input comman
158. d Transferring the Inverter to Running Mode Remove the cause of the alarm and press the key to release the alarm and return to Running mode The alarm can be removed using the Se key only when the current alarm code is displayed m Displaying the Alarm History It is possible to display the most recent 3 alarm codes in addition to the one currently displayed Previous alarm codes can be displayed by pressing the ors Oe z key while the current alarm code is displayed E Displaying the Status of Inverter at the Time of Alarm If an alarm occurs you can check various running status information output frequency output current etc by pressing the Ss key when the alarm code is displayed The item number and data for each running information is displayed in alternation Further you can view various pieces of information on the status of the inverter using the 5 Ne Sor key The information displayed is the same as for Menu 6 Alarm information in Programming mode Refer to Table 3 16 in Section 3 4 6 Reading alarm information Pressing the g key while the status information is displayed returns the display to the alarm codes note When the status information is displayed after removal of the alarm cause pressing the amp key twice switches to the display of the alarm code and then releases the inverter from the alarm state If a run command has been received by this time be careful since the motor will start running
159. d electricians should carry out wiring Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power off Ground the inverter in compliance with the national or local electric code Otherwise electric shock could occur Be sure to perform wiring after installing the inverter body Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Ensure that the number of input phases and the rated voltage of the product match the number of phases and the voltage of the AC power supply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals U V and W Do not insert a braking resistor between terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net v WARNINGA e Generally control signal wires are not reinforced insulation If they accidentally touch any of live parts in the main circuit their insulation coat may break for any reasons In sucha case an extremely high voltage may be applied to the signal lines Make a complete remedy to protect the signal line from contacting any hot high voltage lines Doing so could cause an accident or electric shock A CAUTION Wire the three phase motor to terminals U V and W of the inverter aligning phases each other Other
160. d input after the inverter enters a ready to run state If a run command is received within 2 seconds the inverter begins the restart processing in accordance with the F14 data Mode selection If no run command has been received within 2 second wait period the inverter cancels the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and needs to be started again from the ordinary starting frequency Therefore ensure that a run command is entered within 2 seconds after a recovery of power or install a mechanical latch relay When run commands are entered via the keypad the above operation is also necessary for the mode F02 0 in which the rotational direction is determined by the terminal command FWD or REV In the modes where the rotational direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 it is retained inside the inverter so that the restart will begin as soon as the inverter enters the ready to run state Power failure Retovery DC link bus voltage Undervoltage level No power oy ey Time reserved for restart ss i TSS about 0 3 to 06s Gale ON command _ Gale OFF Ready to run Stata of the inverter a rer Waiting er run command Run command ON ON Restart Note If the Coast to a stop terminal command BX is entered during the power failure the inverter gets out of the restart mode and enters the normal running mode If a run command is entered with power supply app
161. ds sent through the RS 485 communications link Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 22 3 4 5 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information Menu 5 Maintenance information in Programming mode contains information necessary for performing maintenance on the inverter Table 3 15 lists the maintenance information display items and Figure 3 9 shows the status transition for maintenance information l PowerON T rane Soop Made ace Y A E ES O Programming i ie List of maintenance Maintenance info i ea items i Byte e A i o o i SCRE 2732 Cumulative run time i SENO 307 DE link circuit voltage wy 1 ade f a JO a 0 GO Inverter ROM version ie SE m jag Remaining startup Fhe eg gt E2 times before the next maintenance Figure 3 9 Maintenance Information Status Transition Basic key operation Before viewing maintenance information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode 1 When the inverter is powered on it automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the ee key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 With the menu displayed use the and keys to select Maintenance information STAI 3 Press the ee key to display the list of maintenance item codes e g 5_ 7 7 4 Use the x and Ss keys to select the desired maintenan
162. e 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 28 Table 3 17 Running Status 2 amp _ c7 Bit Assignment Content Drive motor type 0 Induction motor 1 Permanent magnet synchronous motor PMSM Not used Content Not used Motor selection 00 Motor 1 01 Motor 2 Invert 0000 0001 Rotation direction limitation 0 Enable 1 Disable 0010 er drive control V f control with slip compensa tion inactive Dynamic torque vector control V f control with slip compensa tion active Table 3 18 Running Status 3 4_ lt 4 Bit Assignment Bit Notation Content Notation Content 15 Not used Not used 14 ID2 Current detected 2 Not used 13 IDL Low current detected Motor overload early warning 12 ID Current detected Oe ines after momentary 11 OLP Overload prevention control Motor 2 selected 10 LIFE Lifetime alarm Not used 9 OH Heat sink overheat early warning Frequency detected 8 TRY Auto resetting Frequency arrival signal Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 29 3 5 Alarm mode When an abnormal condition occurs the protective function is invoked to issue an alarm and the inverter automatically switches to Alarm mode and displays the corresponding alarm code on the LED monitor m Releasing the Alarm an
163. e If the motor is driven by a PWM type inverter surge voltage that is generated by switching the inverter component may be superimposed on the output voltage and may be applied to the motor terminals Particularly if the wiring length is long the surge voltage may deteriorate the insulation resistance of the motor Consider any of the following measures Use a motor with insulation that withstands the surge voltage All Fuji standard motors feature insulation that withstands the surge voltage Connect an output circuit filter option to the output terminals secondary circuits of the inverter Minimize the wiring length between the inverter and motor 10 to 20 m or less DC reactor terminals P1 and P 1 Remove the jumper bar from terminals P1 and P 2 Connect a DC reactor option to terminals P1 and P Cote e The wiring length should be 10 m or below e If both a DC reactor and a braking resistor are to be connected to the inverter secure both wires of the DC reactor and braking resistor together to terminal P Refer to item on the next page Do not remove the jumper bar if a DC reactor is not going to be used A WARNING When wiring the inverter to the power supply of 500 kVA or more be sure to connect an optional DC reactor DCR Otherwise fire could occur Jumper Bar Figure 2 4 Location of Jumper Bar Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation
164. e X E V V3 x1 X x 100 where X1 Primary leakage reactance of the motor Q X2 Secondary leakage reactance of the motor converted to primary Q XM Exciting reactance of the motor Q Cable X Reactance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V l Rated current of the motor A m Rated slip frequency P12 Convert the value obtained from the motor manufacturer to Hz using the following expression and enter the converted value Note The motor rating given on the nameplate sometimes shows a larger value Synchronous speed Rated speed Synchronous speed Rated slip frequency Hz x Base frequency Note For reactance choose the value at the base frequency 1 F04 P09 Motor 1 Slip compensation gain for driving P10 Slip compensation response time P11 Slip compensation gain for braking P09 and P11 determine the slip compensation amount in for driving and braking individually Specification of 100 fully compensates for the rated slip of the motor Excessive compensation P09 P11 gt 100 may cause a system oscillation so carefully check the operation on the actual machine P10 determines the response time for slip compensation Basically there is no need to modify the default setting If you need to modify it consult your Fuji Electric representatives Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 62 P99
165. e current limiting to suppress the increase of the inverter output frequency causing hunting undesirable oscillation of the system or activating the inverter overvoltage trip alarm 71 When specifying the acceleration time therefore you need to take into account machinery characteristics and moment of inertia of the load ACAUTION When the instantaneous overcurrent limiting is enabled the motor output torque could drop For driving elevating machinery which could cause a serious problem with a drop of the motor output torque therefore disable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting Note that disabling it will cause an overcurrent trip when a current exceeding the inverter protection level flows so secure the protective coordination using a mechanical brake An accident could occur Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 73 H45 Mock Alarm H97 Clear Alarm Data H45 causes the inverter to generate a mock alarm in order to check whether external sequences function correctly at the time of machine setup Setting the H45 data to 1 displays mock alarm on the LED monitor It also issues alarm output ALM if assigned to a digital output terminal specified by E20 or E27 Accessing the H45 data requires simultaneous keying of sm key AN key After that the H45 data automatically reverts to 0 allowing you to reset the alarm Just as for da
166. e exceeds three times the specified one Enable Torque limit control Disable force to stop processing Note Enabling the anti regenerative control may automatically increase the deceleration time When a braking resistor is connected disable the anti regenerative control H70 Overload Prevention Control H70 specifies the decelerating rate of the output frequency to prevent a trip from occurring due to an overload This control decreases the output frequency of the inverter before the inverter trips due to a heat sink overheat or inverter overload with an alarm indication of iH or LiL Li respectively It is useful for equipment such as pumps where a decrease in the output frequency leads to a decrease in the load and it is necessary to keep the motor running even when the output frequency drops Data for H70 Function 0 00 Decelerate the motor by deceleration time 1 F08 or 2 E11 0 01 to 100 00 Decelerate the motor by deceleration rate from 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s 999 Disable overload prevention control Note In equipment where a decrease in the output frequency does not lead to a decrease in the load the overload prevention control is of no use and should not be enabled H71 Deceleration Characteristics Setting the H71 data to 1 ON enables forced brake control If regenerative energy produced during deceleration of the motor and returned to the inverter exceeds the inverter s braking
167. e grounding terminal G Cnote The wiring length between the inverter and motor should not exceed 50 m If it exceeds 50 m it is recommended that an output circuit filter option be inserted Do not use one multicore cable to connect several inverters with motors No output circuit filter inserted Output circuit filter inserted 5 mor less Output circuit filter 50 m or less 400 m or less Note Do not connect a phase advancing capacitor or surge absorber to the inverter s output lines Secondary circuit e If the wiring length is long the stray capacitance between the wires will increase resulting in an outflow of the leakage current It will activate the overcurrent protection increase the leakage current or will not assure the accuracy of the current display In the worst case the inverter could be damaged If more than one motor is to be connected to a single inverter the wiring length should be the total length of the wires to the motors Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 8 CNote Driving 400 V series motor e Ifathermal relay is installed in the path between the inverter and the motor to protect the motor from overheating the thermal relay may malfunction even with a wiring length shorter than 50 m In this situation add an output circuit filter option or lower the carrier frequency Function code F26 Motor sound Carrier frequency
168. e parts supply period holding period Concerning models products which have gone out of production this company will perform repairs for a period of 7 years after production stop counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs In addition we will continue to supply the spare parts required for repairs for a period of 7 years counting from the month and year when the production stop occurs However if it is estimated that the life cycle of certain electronic and other parts is short and it will be difficult to procure or produce those parts there may be cases where it is difficult to provide repairs or supply spare parts even within this 7 year period For details please confirm at our company s business office or our service office 4 Transfer rights In the case of standard products which do not include settings or adjustments in an application program the products shall be transported to and transferred to the customer and this company shall not be responsible for local adjustments or trial operation 5 Service contents The cost of purchased and delivered products does not include the cost of dispatching engineers or service costs Depending on the request these can be discussed separately 6 Applicable scope of service Above contents shall be assumed to apply to transactions and use of the country where you purchased the products Consult the local supplier or Fuji for the detail separately Phone 80
169. e temperature around the inverter gt Lower the temperature around the inverter e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted 2 Ventilation path is blocked Check if there is sufficient clearance around the inverter gt Change the mounting place to ensure the clearance Check if the heat sink is not clogged gt Clean the heat sink 3 Service life of cooling fan has expired or cooling fan is faulty 4 Load was too heavy Check the cumulative run time of the cooling fan Refer to Chapter 3 Section 3 4 5 Reading maintenance information Maintenance Information gt Replace the cooling fan Visually check whether the cooling fan rotates normally gt Replace the cooling fan Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 to reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase gt Decease the motor sound Carrier frequency F26 gt Enable the overload prevention control H70 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 14 GHZ External alarm 7 Problem External alarm was inputted THR when THR Enable external alarm trip is assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 through X3 Possible Causes 1 An alarm function of external equipment was activated FWD and REV What to
170. ease the torque boost F09 A05 5 Acceleration deceleration time currently specified is too short Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed for the current load based on the moment of inertia of the load and the acceleration deceleration time gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 gt Enable current limiter F43 gt Raise the inverter capacity 6 Malfunction caused by noise 2 Gn Overvoltage Check if noise control measures are appropriate e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual Appendix A gt Enable the Auto reset H04 gt Connect a surge absorber to magnetic contactor s coils or other solenoids if any causing noise Problem The DC link bus voltage was over the detection level of overvoltage HII Lili i Overvoltage occurs during the acceleration EIZ Overvoltage occurs during the deceleration THRA Lia Overvoltage occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The power supply voltage exceeded the inverter s specification range What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Decrease the voltage to within the specified range 2 Asurge current entered the input power supply In the same power line if a phase advancing capacitor is turned ON OFF or
171. eb www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 7 7 The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 The data of function Check if an undervoltage trip 1 occurs oe F14 iszoither 0 00 gt Change the data of function code F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure Mode selection to 4 or 5 2 The run command Check the input signal with Menu 4 I O Checking using the remains OFF even after keypad the power has been restored gt Check the power recovery sequence with an external circuit If necessary consider the use of a relay that can keep the run command ON In 3 wire operation the power to the inverter s control PCB has been shut down once because of a long momentary power failure or the HLD terminal command Enable 3 wire operation has been turned OFF once gt Change the design or the setting so that a run command can be issued again within 2 seconds after power has been restored 8 The motor does not run as expected Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Incorrect configuration Check that function codes are correctly configured and no of function codes unnecessary configuration has been made gt Configure all function codes correctly Make a note of function code data currently configured and then initialize all function code data H03 gt
172. ecision Rated slip frequency P12 A26 Upon completion of the tuning each motor parameter will be automatically saved into the applicable function code 3 Preparation of machine system Perform appropriate preparations on the motor and its load such as disengaging the coupling and deactivating the safety device Switch to the motor 1 or motor 2 which the tuning is to be performed on Tuning results by P04 will be applied to P codes for the motor 1 and tuning results by A18 will be applied to A codes for the motor 2 Cot Assigning the SWM2 signal Switch to motor 2 to terminal Y1 or 30A B C ole automatically switches the output status of SWM2 depending on the motor selected for tuning 4 Perform tuning T Set function code P04 or A18 to 1 or 2 and press the oe key The blinking of or lt on the LED monitor slows down Enter a run command for the rotation direction selected The factory default is unt key on the keypad for forward rotation To switch to reverse rotation change the data of Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 3 function code F02 The display of or c stays lit and tuning starts with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 40 s If P04 or A18 2 the motor is accelerated to approximately 50 of the base frequency and then tuning starts Upon completion of measurements the motor dec
173. ed e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires Also perform the same check as described in 1 above gt Implement noise control measures Revert the initialized function code data to their previous settings then restart the operation g Any error in control circuit Initialize the function code data by setting HO3 to 1 then reset the alarm by pressing the key and check that the alarm goes on gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 18 13 amp lt Keypad communications error Problem inverter Possible Causes 1 Broken communications cable or poor contact A communications error occurred between the remote keypad option and the What to Check and Suggested Measures Check continuity of the cable contacts and connections gt Re insert the connector firmly gt Replace the cable 2 Inverter affected by strong electrical noise Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures For details refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual Appendix A 3 The remote keypad option defective 14 amp 7 CPU error Problem A CPU error e g Possible Causes
174. ed by overheat and deterioration 3 Check for contamination and accumulation of dust or dirt 1 Retighten 2 3 Visual inspection 1 2 3 No abnormalities Conductors and wires 1 Check conductors for discoloration and distortion caused by overheat 2 Check the sheath of the wires for cracks and discoloration 1 2 Visual inspection 1 2 No abnormalities Terminal blocks Check that the terminal blocks are not damaged Visual inspection No abnormalities DC link bus capacitor Main circuit 1 Check for electrolyte leakage discoloration cracks and swelling of the case 2 Check that the safety valve does not protrude remarkably 3 Measure the capacitance if necessary 1 2 Visual inspection 3 Measure the discharge time with capacitance probe 1 2 No abnormalities 3 The discharge time should not be shorter than the one specified by the replacement manual Braking resistor 1 Check for abnormal odor or cracks in insulators caused by overheat 2 Check for broken wires 1 Olfactory and visual inspection 2 Check the wires visually Or disconnect either wire and measure the conductivity with a multimeter 1 No abnormalities 2 Within 10 of the resistance of the braking resistor Transformer and reactor Check for abnormal roaring noise and odor Auditory visual and olfactory inspection No abno
175. eed the information indicated by this symbol may A WARN N G lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may A CAU Tl O N lead to dangerous conditions possibly resulting in minor or light bodily injuries and or substantial property damage Failure to heed the information contained under the CAUTION title can also result in serious con sequences These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times Application AWARNING e FRENIC Mini is designed to drive a three phase induction motor and three phase per manent magnet synchronous motor PMSM Do not use it for single phase motors or for other purposes Fire or an accident could occur e FRENIC Mini may not be used for a life support system or other purposes directly related to the human safety Though FRENIC Mini is manufactured under strict quality control install safety devices for applications where serious accidents or material losses are foreseen in relation to the failure of it An accident could occur Installation A WARNING e Install the inverter on a nonflammable material such as metal Otherwise fire could occur Do not place flammable matter nearby Doing so could cause fire Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net iv
176. elerates to a stop Estimated tuning time Acceleration time 20 s Deceleration time 5 Tuning continues with the motor stopped Maximum tuning time Approx 10 s If the terminal signal FWD or REV is selected as a run command F02 1 Enc appears upon completion of the measurements The run command is turned OFF The run command given through the keypad or the communications link is automatically turned OFF The tuning completes and the next function code 1 5 or AiL appears on the keypad E Tuning errors Improper tuning would negatively affect the operation performance and in the worst case could even cause hunting or deteriorate precision Therefore if the inverter finds any abnormality in the tuning results or any error in the tuning process it displays 7 and discards the tuning data Listed below are possible causes that trigger tuning errors Possible tuning i error causes Details Error in tuning An interphase voltage unbalance has been detected results Tuning has resulted in an abnormally high or low value of a parameter Output current error An abnormally high current has flown during tuning During tuning a run command has been turned OFF or BX Coast to a stop or other similar terminal command has been received Sequence error During tuning any of the operation limiters has been activated Error due to 9 gany p limitation The maximum frequency or the frequency
177. en the inverter is used to run a general purpose motor the temperature of the motor becomes higher than when it is operated using a commercial power supply In the low speed range the cooling effect will be weakened so decrease the output torque of the motor If constant torque is required in the low speed range use a Fuji inverter motor or a motor equipped with an externally powered ventilating fan Vibration When an inverter driven motor is mounted to a machine resonance may be caused by the natural frequencies of the machine system Note that operation of a 2 pole motor at 60 Hz or higher may cause abnormal vibration The use of a rubber coupling or vibration dampening rubber is recommended Use the inverter s jump frequency control feature to skip the resonance frequency zone s Noise When an inverter is used with a general purpose motor the motor noise level is higher than that with a commercial power supply To reduce noise raise carrier frequency of the in verter Operation at 60 Hz or higher can also result in higher noise level In running special mo tors High speed mo tors If the reference frequency is set to 120 Hz or more to drive a high speed motor test run the combination of the inverter and motor beforehand to check for safe operation Explosion proof motors When driving an explosion proof motor with an inverter use a combination of a motor and an inverter that has been ap
178. ency 0 00 to 400 00 2 0 01 Hz Y Y 0 00 C21 Timer Operation 0 Disable N N 0 5 60 1 Enable C30 Frequency Command 2 0 UP DOWN keys on keypad N y 2 5 21 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC 2 Current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC 3 Sum of voltage and current inputs to terminals 12 and C1 4 Built in potentiometer POT 7 Terminal command UP DOWN control C32 Analog Input Adjustment 0 00 to 200 00 2 0 01 ve Y 100 0 5 36 for Terminal 12 Gain C33 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 s Y iY 0 05 5 60 C34 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 2 0 01 Yt Y 100 00 5 36 C37 Analog Input Adjustment 0 00 to 200 00 2 0 01 Y Y 100 00 for Terminal C1 Gain C38 Filter time constant 0 00 to 5 00 0 01 s Y N 0 05 5 60 c39 Gain base point 0 00 to 100 00 2 0 01 y Y 100 00 5 36 C40 Terminal C1 Input 0 4 to 20 mA N y 0 Range Selection 1 0 to 20 mA C50 Bias 0 00 to 100 00 2 0 01 ys Y 0 00 5 36 Frequency command 1 Bias base point C51 Bias PID command 1 Bias value 100 00 to 100 00 2 0 01 Y Y 0 00 C52 Bias base point 0 00 to 100 00 2 0 01 Y bi 0 00 2 When you make settings from tl display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is mye for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 e
179. ency detection level specified by E31 and it goes OFF when the output frequency drops below the Frequency detection level E31 Hysteresis width E32 E Undervoltage detected LU Function code data 3 This output signal comes ON when the DC link bus voltage of the inverter drops below the specified undervoltage level and it goes OFF when the voltage exceeds the level This signal is ON also when the undervoltage protective function is activated so that the motor is in an abnormal stop state e g tripped When this signal is ON a run command is disabled if given E Inverter output limiting IOL Function code data 5 This output signal comes ON when the inverter is limiting the output frequency by activating any of the following actions minimum width of the output signal 100 ms e Current limiting by software F43 and F44 Instantaneous overcurrent limiting by hardware H12 1 Automatic deceleration Anti regenerative control H69 2 or 4 When the IOL signal is ON the output frequency may have deviated from the specified frequency because of the limiting function above m Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Function code data 6 This output signal is ON either during continuous running after a momentary power failure or during the period from when the inverter has detected an undervoltage condition and shut down the output until restart has been completed the output has reached the re
180. ency with the lowest digit blinking 3 To change the reference frequency press the Sor we key again The new setting will be automatically saved into the inverter s memory It is kept there even if the inverter is powered off and it will be used as the initial frequency next time the inverter is powered on Tip elf you have set the function code F01 to 0 wz wa keys on the built in keypad but have selected a frequency setting other than frequency 1 i e frequency 2 Via communica tions or Multistep frequency then the w or key cannot be used for setting up the reference frequency even if the keypad is in Running mode Pressing either of these keys will just display the currently selected reference frequency When you start changing the reference frequency or any other parameter with the wz or Mm key the lowest digit on the display will blink and start changing As you are holding the key down blinking will gradually move to the upper digit places and the upper digits will be changeable If you press the or Oe key once and then hold down the a key for more than 1 second after the lowest digit starts blinking blinking will move to the next upper digit place to allow you to change the value of that digit cursor movement This way you can easily change the values of the higher digits By setting function code C30 to 0 ALS keys on the built in keypad and selecting frequency set 2 as the frequency setting method you can a
181. epending on the cause of the tripping Design the machinery so that human body and peripheral equipment safety is ensured even when the auto resetting succeeds Otherwise an accident could occur Reset interval H05 After the reset interval specified by H05 from when the inverter enters the tripped state it issues a reset command to auto reset the tripped state Refer to the timing scheme diagram below lt Timing scheme for failed retry No of reset times 3 gt Alarm factor Proteclive function a Tripped state Reset command Inverter output Irequency Auto reset i i i i signal TRY i Alarm output for any alarm Oo Time The auto reset operation can be monitored from the external equipment by assigning the digital output signal TRY to any of the programmable output terminals Y1 and 80A B C with E20 or E27 data 26 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 70 H06 Cooling Fan ON OFF Control To prolong the life of the cooling fan and reduce fan noise during running the cooling fan stops when the temperature inside the inverter drops below a certain level while the inverter stops However since frequent switching of the cooling fan shortens its life the cooling fan is kept running for 10 minutes once it is started HO6 specifies whether to keep running the cooling fan all the time or to control
182. eration when using the FRENIC Mini series in a system to be certified by the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If you want to use the FRENIC Mini series of inverters in systems equipment in the EU refer to the guidelines on page viii Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 6 Compact Inverter FRENIC Mini Instruction Manual First Edition March 2013 Second Edition June 2013 Fuji Electric Co Ltd The purpose of this instruction manual is to provide accurate information in handling setting up and operating of the FRENIC Mini series of inverters Please feel free to send your comments regarding any errors or omissions you may have found or any suggestions you may have for generally improving the manual In no event will Fuji Electric Co Ltd be liable for any direct or indirect damages resulting from the application of the information in this manual Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net SSS ll Fuji Electric Co Ltd Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net
183. es H50 through H53 these function codes may profile the non linear V f pattern by specifying increase or decrease in voltage at any point on the V f pattern The following description includes setups required for the non linear V f pattern At high frequencies the motor impedance may increase resulting in an insufficient output voltage and a decrease in output torque This feature is used to increase the voltage with the maximum output voltage 1 to prevent this problem from happening Note however that you cannot increase the output voltage beyond the voltage of the inverter s input power Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 23 E Base Frequency 1 F04 Set the rated frequency printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor E Rated Voltage at Base Frequency F05 Set 0 or the rated voltage printed on the nameplate labeled on the motor If 0 is set the rated voltage at base frequency is determined by the power source of the inverter The output voltage will vary in line with any variance in input voltage If the data is set to anything other than 0 the inverter automatically keeps the output voltage constant in line with the setting When any of the auto torque boost settings auto energy saving or slip compensation is active the voltage settings should be equal to the rated voltage of the motor m Non linear V f Patterns 1 and 2 for Frequency H50 and H52
184. esistance is too low wires relay terminals and motor Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals U V and W and measure the interphase resistance of the motor wiring gt Remove the short circuited parts including replacement of the 2 Ground faults have occurred at the inverter and W and perform a Megger test output lines Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net relay terminals and motor 6 10 Disconnect the wiring from the inverter output terminals U V gt Remove the grounded parts including replacement of the wires Possible Causes 3 Loads were too heavy What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the motor current with a measuring device to trace the current trend Then use this data to judge if the trend is over the calculated load value for your system design gt If the load is too heavy reduce it or raise the inverter capacity Trace the current trend and check if there are any sudden changes in the current gt If there are any sudden changes make the load fluctuation smaller or raise the inverter capacity gt Enable instantaneous overcurrent limiting H12 1 4 Excessive torque boost specified when F37 A13 0 1 3 or 4 Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 A05 reduces the output current but does not stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decr
185. eypad option is used Another inverter or equipment such as a PWM converter is connected to the terminals of the DC link bus For details refer to Chapter 7 To set data of H98 assign functions to each bit total 5 bits and set it in decimal format The table below lists functions assigned to each bit Bit number Select life Lower the judgment ae ae carrier threshold of DC frequency link bus capacitor phase loss phase loss automatically Data 0 Disable Use the factory Disable Disable Disable default Data 1 Enable Use the user Enable Enable Enable setting Example of Enable 1 Use the factory Disable 0 Enable 1 Enable 1 decimal default 0 expression 19 Judge the life Function of DC link bus capacitor Conversion table Decimal to from binary Decimal oO oO 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Oo oO oO DOINIOD aA R O M oO ajajasjaljajajajajololololojlojlo alalalalolofojo ololo sa Aalolo lojoj Aalolo jo a ol lol lol lojafos Aasfo jo alajalaljalalalajolololololojo alalalalolofolol ololo s 2lolo loloj Aalolo jo s2 ol lolAalol jojafos asfol jo ojojojojojojojojojojojojojojo Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 77 5
186. eys to select the desired function code group In this example select F__ 3 Press the a key to proceed to the function codes in the function code group selected in 2 In this example function code W appears Even if the function code list for a particular function code group is displayed it is possible to transfer the display to a different function code group using the a Sand w keys 4 Select the desired function code using the wz and WA keys and press the example select function code 7 w key In this The data of this function code appears on ans example data of appears 5 Change the function code data using the N S and6 K keys In this example press the wa key four times to change data to 7 6 Press the amp The SALI appears and the data will be saved in the memory inside the inverter The display will return to the function code list then move to the next function code In this example i Pressing the E key instead of the amp Se key cancels the change made to the data The data reverts to the previous value the display returns to the function code list and the original func tion code reappears key to establish the function code data 7 Press the se key to return to the menu from the function code list Gio lt Cursor movement gt You can move the cursor when changing function code data by holding down the ee key for 1 second or longer in the
187. ference frequency To enable this IPF signal set F14 Restart mode after momentary power failure to 4 Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred or 5 Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency beforehand m Motor overload early warning OL Function code data 7 This output signal is used to issue a motor overload early warning that enables you to take an mu corrective action before the inverter detects a motor overload alarm 41 and shuts down its output Refer to the description of E34 m Service lifetime alarm LIFE Function code data 30 This output signal comes ON when it is judged that the service life of any one of capacitors DC link bus capacitors and electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit board and cooling fan has expired This signal should be used as a guide for replacement of the capacitors and cooling fan If this signal comes ON use the specified maintenance procedure to check the service life of these parts and determine whether the parts should be replaced or not 2 For details about the judgment on service life refer to Table 7 3 Criteria for Issuing a Lifetime Alarm in Chapter 7 Section 7 3 List of Periodical Replacement Parts Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 54 Inverter running 2 RUN2 Function code data 35 This signal acts in the same way as RUN Function
188. for the last 4 alarms is saved as an alarm history 4 Each time the S or recentoneas Z 3 so r key is pressed the last 4 alarms are displayed in order from the most 3 and 4 5 While the alarm code is displayed press the ee key to have the corresponding alarm item number proximately 1 second You can also have the item number e g amp _4 and data e g Output current for any other item displayed using the Na and amp Sr w keys 6 Press the key to return to th LED monitor shows item No e g 6 Lii Uy fae and data e g Output frequency displayed alternately in intervals of ap ma at e alarm list Press the z key again to return to the menu Table 3 16 Alarm Information Displayed Contents Output frequency Description Output frequency before slip compensation Output current Present output current Output voltage Present output voltage Calculated torque Calculated motor output torque Reference frequency Present reference frequency Rotational direction nis shows the running direction being output forward reverse Running status This shows the running status in hexadecimal Refer to Dis playing running status in Section 3 4 3 Monitoring the running status Cumulative run time Shows the cumulative power ON time of the inverter Unit thousands of hours When the total ON time is less than 1
189. frequency 1 f b Reference frequency 1 E30 f lt ff lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt lt 5 Reference frequency 2 E30 f f t mammann mm mmm Reference frequency 2 Reference frequency 2 E30 f7 D Frequency arrival signal FAR i ON l the ha ee Geni nan dasa Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 56 E34 E35 Overload Early Warning Low Current Detection Level and Timer E37 E38 Current Detection 2 Level and Timer These function codes define the detection level and timer for the OL Motor overload early warning ID Current detected D2 Current detected 2 and IDL Low current detected output signals Output seared Detection level limer Sean Sea signal to output Range J Pana Range INT Range terminal See below 0 01 to 600 00 s See below 0 5 to 75 0 min OL T E34 F10 F12 ID 37 E34 E35 ID2 38 E37 E38 S4 IDL 41 E34 E35 Data setting range Operation level 0 00 Disable 1 to 200 of inverter rated current Motor characteristics 1 Enable For a general purpose motor and Fuji standard permanent magnet synchronous motor with shaft driven cooling fan 2 Enable For an inverter driven motor with separately powered cooling fan Motor overload early warning signal OL The OL signal is used to detect a symptom of a
190. g control Y2 P92 q axis compensation 0 0 to 25 0 999 Table value 0 1 Y Y1 999 gain under damping Y2 control P93 Step out detection 0 0 to 100 999 Table value 1 Y Y1 999 current level Y2 P99 Motor 1 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard IM N Vi 0 5 63 8 series y2 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating IM 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard IM 6 series 4 Other motors IM 20 Other motors PMSM 21 Fuji standard PMSM without sensor 1 The PMSM drive is available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 12 H codes High Performance Functions A Incre Change Data Default Refer Code Name Data setting range Unit when j to ment n copying setting running page H03 Data Initialization 0 Disable initialization a N N 0 5 64 1 Initialize all function code data to the factory defaults 2 Initialize motor 1 parameters 3 Initialize motor 2 parameters H04 Auto reset Times 0 Disable 1 to 10 1 times Y Y 0 5 70 HO5 Reset interval 0 5 to 20 0 0 1 s Y Y 5 0 HO06 Cooling Fan ON OFF 0 Disable Cooling fan always ON Y Y 0 5 71 Control 1 Enable ON OFF control effective H07 Acceleration 0 Linear Y Y 0 Deceleration Pattern 14 S curve Weak
191. ge trip Since increasing the output frequency too much under anti regenerative control is dangerous the inverter has a torque limiter Frequency increment limit for braking that can be specified by H76 The torque limiter limits the inverter s output frequency to less than Reference frequency H76 setting Note that the torque limiter activated restrains the anti regenerative control resulting in a trip with an overvoltage alarm in some cases Increasing the H76 data 0 0 to 400 0 Hz makes the anti regenerative control capability high In addition during deceleration triggered by turning the run command OFF the anti regenerative control increases the output frequency so that the inverter may not stop the load depending on the load state huge moment of inertia for example To avoid that H69 provides a choice of cancellation of the anti regenerative control to apply when three times the specified deceleration time is elapsed thus decelerating the motor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 74 Data for H69 Function Disable Enable Lengthen the deceleration time to three times the specified time under voltage limiting control Compatible with the original FRENIC Mini series FRN c10 Enable Torque limit control Cancel the anti regenerative control if the actual deceleration tim
192. hat a frequency command has been entered correctly using Menu 4 I O Checking on the keypad gt Set the frequency command to the same or higher than that of the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 gt Reconsider the starting and stop frequencies F23 and F25 and if necessary change them to lower values gt Inspect the external frequency command potentiometers signal converters switches or relay contacts Replace any ones that are faulty gt Connect the external circuit wires correctly to terminals 13 12 11 and C1 6 2 Possible Causes 7 A frequency command with higher priority than the one attempted was active What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad referring to the block diagram of the drive command generator Refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data e g cancel the higher priority run command amp The upper and lower frequencies for the frequency limiters were set incorrectly Check the data of function codes F15 Frequency limiter High and F16 Frequency limiter Low gt Change the settings of F15 and F16 to the correct ones Ss The coast to stop command was effective Check the data of function codes E01 through E03 E98 and E99 and the input signal status using Menu 4 I
193. he desired menu is not displayed 3 Gata of function cades cannot be changed If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor SOG lo Section 6 4 ifan abnormal pattern appears on ihe LED manitor Go ho Section C4 while no alarm code is displayed If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure contact your Fuji Electric representative Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 1 6 2 If No Alarm Code Appears on the LED Monitor 6 2 1 Abnormal motor operation 1 The motor does not rotate Possible Causes 1 No power supplied to the inverter What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the input voltage output voltage and interphase voltage unbalance gt Turn ON a molded case circuit breaker MCCB a residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or a magnetic contactor MC gt Check for voltage drop phase loss poor connections or poor contacts and fix them if necessary 2 No run forward reverse command was inputted or both the commands were inputted simultaneously external signal operation Check the input status of the forward reverse command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input a run command gt Set either the forward or reverse operation command to off if both commands are being inputted gt Correct the assignment of com
194. hese controls auto torque boost torque calculation monitoring auto energy saving operation automatic deceleration anti regenerative control slip compensation and torque vector control The motor to be driven is made by other manufacturer or is a non standard motor Cabling between the motor and the inverter is long A reactor is inserted between the motor and the inverter Q For details of auto tuning refer to Chapter 4 Section 4 1 3 Preparation before a test run Configuring function code data P06 P07 P08 P12 Motor 1 No load current R1 X and Motor 1 Rated slip frequency P06 through P08 and P12 specify no load current R1 X and rated slip frequency respectively Obtain the appropriate values from the test report of the motor or by calling the manufacturer of the motor Performing auto tuning automatically sets these parameters m No load current P06 Enter the value obtained from the motor manufacturer m R1 P07 Enter the value calculated by the following expression R1 Cable R1 R1 x 100 Vissi 0 where R1 Primary resistance of the motor Q Cable R1 Resistance of the output cable Q V Rated voltage of the motor V l Rated current of the motor A Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 61 m X P08 Enter the value calculated by the following expression _ X1 X2x XM X2 XM Cabl
195. hina Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 e keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number o E Europe and U USA digits that the LED monitor can Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 7 E codes continued i Incre n Change Data Default Reter Code Name Data setting range ment Unit when copying setting to running page E37 Current Detection 2 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 100 0 0 01 A Y Y1 See 5 57 Level Current value of 1 to 200 of the inverter Y2 Table rated current A E38 Timer 0 01 to 600 00 2 0 01 s Y Y 10 00 E39 Coefficient for Constant 0 000 to 9 999 0 001 Y Y 0 000 5 58 Feeding Rate Time E40 PID Display Coefficient 999 to 0 00 to 9990 3 0 01 Y Y 100 A E41 PID Display Coefficient 999 to 0 00 to 9990 3 0 01 Y Y 0 00 B E42 LED Display Filter 0 0 to 5 0 0 1 Y Y 0 5 E43 LED Monitor 0 Speed monitor select by E48 Y Y 0 Display item 3 Output current 4 Output voltage 9 Input power 10 PID command 12 PID feedback amount 13 Timer 14 PID output 25 Input watt hour E45 Note E46 E47 E48 LED Monitor 0 Output frequency Before slip Y Y 0 Speed monit
196. htning or other disaster eS Q 2 Furthermore the warranty specified herein shall be limited to the purchased or delivered product alone 3 The upper limit for the warranty range shall be as specified in item 1 above and any damages damage to or loss of machinery or equipment or lost profits from the same etc consequent to or resulting from breakdown of the purchased or delivered product shall be excluded from coverage by this warranty 3 Trouble diagnosis As a rule the customer is requested to carry out a preliminary trouble diagnosis However at the customer s request this company or its service network can perform the trouble diagnosis on a chargeable basis In this case the customer is asked to assume the burden for charges levied in accordance with this company s fee schedule 2 Exclusion of liability for loss of opportunity etc Regardless of whether a breakdown occurs during or after the free of charge warranty period this company shall not be liable for any loss of opportunity loss of profits or damages arising from special circumstances secondary damages accident compensation to another company or damages to products other than this company s products whether foreseen or not by this company which this company is not be responsible for causing Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 10 3 Repair period after production stop spar
197. ictly regulated as stated below If an inverter whose rated input is 1 kW or less is connected to public low voltage power supply it is regulated by the harmonics emission regulations from inverters to power lines with the exception of industrial low voltage power lines Refer to Figure 11 2 below for details Medium voltage User C Transformer from medium voltage to low voltage Transformer frorn medium voltage to low vollage w Public low voltage fewer supply Industrial low voltage power supply Inverter IKA or less Inverter 1K or less 1 fe s 1 __ The inverter connected here is _ The inverter connected regulated by the harmonics here ig not regulated reguiatians If lhe harmonics fl wing lo the power source exceeds the regulated level permission by the local power supplier will be needed Figure 11 2 Power Source and Regulation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 5 11 3 2 Compliance with the harmonic component regulation Power supply voltage Three phase 200 V Table 11 2 Compliance with Harmonic Component Regulation Inverter type FRNOOO1C2S 20 w o DC reactor w DC reactor Applicable DC reactor type DCR2 0 2 FRN0002C2S 20 DCR2 0 2 FRN0004C2S 20 DCR2 0 4 FRN0006C2S 20 DCR2 0 75 Three phase 400 V FRN0002C2S 40 DCR4 0 4
198. in reducing noise from long power feed lines such as those used in plants etc Use an OFL within the allowable carrier frequency range specified by function code F26 Motor sound carrier frequency Otherwise the filter will overheat Note Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 3 Name of option Function and application Main option Ferrite ring reactors for reducing radio frequency noise ACL An ACL is used to reduce radio noise emitted by the inverter An ACL suppresses the outflow of high frequency harmonics caused by switching operation for the power supply primary lines inside the inverter Pass the power supply lines together through the ACL for 4 turns coiled 3 times If wiring length between the inverter and motor is less than 20 m insert an ACL to the power supply primary lines if it is more than 20 m insert it to the power output Secondary lines of the inverter Options for Operation and Communications External potentiometer for frequency commands An external potentiometer may be used to set the drive frequency Connect the potentiometer to control signal terminals 11 to 13 of the inverter Remote keypad This allows you to perform remote operation of the inverter With the remote keypad you can copy function code data configured in the inverter to any other inverter Keypad models TP E1U and T
199. ing 9 External alarm to any of terminals X1 to X3 FWD or REV function code E01 to E03 E98 or E99 For details refer to Chapter 9 Note 5 Frequency can be set by connecting a frequency setting device external potentiometer between terminals 11 12 and 13 instead of inputting voltage signal 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to 5 VDC between terminals 12 and 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 7 Note 6 For the wiring of the control circuit use shielded or twisted wires When using shielded wires connect the shields to earth To prevent malfunction due to noise keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible recommended 10 cm or longer and never set them in the same wire duct When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring set them at right angles Note 7 It is recommended for noise control that 3 phase 4 wire cable be used for the motor wiring Connect grounding wires of the motor to the grounding terminal SG on the inverter The basic connection diagram above is for running stopping the inverter and setting the frequency with external signals Given below are connection notes 1 Set function code F02 to 1 External signals 2 Set function code F01 to 1 Voltage input to terminal 12 or 2 Current input to terminal C1 3 Short circuit terminals FWD and CM to
200. ion If the motor enters a decelerate to stop operation by turning OFF the run command or by decreasing the reference frequency below the stop frequency the inverter activates the DC braking by flowing a current at the braking level F21 during the braking time F22 when the output frequency reaches the DC braking starting frequency F20 Setting the braking time F22 to 0 00 disables the DC braking E Braking starting frequency F20 F20 specifies the frequency at which the DC braking starts its operation during motor decelerate to stop state E Braking level F21 F21 specifies the output current level to be applied when the DC braking is activated The function code data should be set assuming the rated output current of the inverter as 100 in increments of 1 E Braking time F22 F22 specifies the braking period that activates DC braking E Braking response mode H95 H95 specifies the DC braking response mode Data for H95 Characteristics Slow response Slows the rising edge of Insufficient braking torque may the current thereby preventing reverse result at the start of DC braking rotation at the start of DC braking Quick response Quickens the rising Reverse rotation may result edge of the current thereby accelerating depending on the moment of the build up of the braking torque inertia of the mechanical load and the coupling mechanism Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiauto
201. ion code data except F00 Disable data protection and enable digital reference protection allowing you to change function code data with the N V keys But you cannot change digital reference data Enable both data protection and digital reference protection not allowing you to change function code data or digital reference data with the N M keys Enabling the protection disables the 4 keys to change function code data To change F00 data simultaneous keying of Gro N from 0 to 1 or Gro g from 1 to 0 keys is required Tip Even when FOO 1 or 3 function code data can be changed via the communications link For similar purposes WE KP a signal enabling editing of function code data from the keypad is provided as a terminal command for digital input terminals Refer to the descriptions of E01 through E03 F01 C30 Frequency Command 1 Frequency Command 2 F01 or C30 sets the command source that specifies reference frequency 1 or reference frequency 2 respectively Data for Enable N keys on the keypad Refer to Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD Enable the voltage input to terminal 12 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 21 Data for F01 C30 Function Enable the current input to terminal C1 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC maxi
202. ipment manufacturer For this reason Fuji s CE mark is indicated under the condition that the product shall be used within equipment meeting all requirements for the relevant Directives Instrumentation of such equipment shall be the responsibility of the equipment manufacturer Generally machinery or equipment includes not only our products but other devices as well Manufacturers therefore shall design the whole system to be compliant with the relevant Directives In addition to satisfy the requirements noted above use a Fuji FRENIC inverter in connection with an EMC compliant filter optional feature in accordance with the instructions contained in this instruction manual Installing the inverter s in a metal panel may be necessary depending upon the operating environment of the equipment that the inverter is to be used with 11 2 2 Recommended installation procedure To make the machinery or equipment fully compliant with the EMC Directive have certified technicians wire the motor and inverter in strict accordance with the procedure described below E Incase an outboard EMC compliant optional is used 1 Install the inverter and the filter on a grounded metal plate Use a shielded cable also for connection of the motor Make the motor cable as short as possible Connect the shielding layer firmly to the metal plate Also connect the shielding layer electrically to the grounding terminal of the motor 2 Use shielded cable for co
203. ircuit ae c voc 1 4 13 Resistor 7 Opuration lavel iki H27 inerrustor FSE ASOU F Comparator AEI of y External T converter PTE Resistor alam 7 Resistor 4 egy year Analog Common terminal for analog input and output signals common This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals CM and Y1E Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 12 Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions Classifi cation These low level analog signals are especially susceptible to the external noise effects Route the wiring as short as possible within 20 m and use shielded wires In principle ground the shielded sheath of wires if effects of external inductive noises are con siderable connection to terminal 11 may be effective As shown in Figure 2 5 ground the single end of the shield to enhance the shield effect Use a twin contact relay for low level signals if the relay is used in the control circuit Do not connect the relay s contact to terminal 11 When the inverter is connected to an external device outputting analog signals the external device may malfunction due to electric noise generated by the inverter If this happens according to the circumstances connect a ferrite core a toroidal core or equivalent to the device outputting analog signals or connect a
204. iring for control circuit terminals WARNINGA In general sheaths and covers of the control signal cables and wires are not specifically de signed to withstand a high electric field i e reinforced insulation is not applied Therefore if a control signal cable or wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the main circuit the insulation of the sheath or the cover might break down which would expose the signal wire to a high voltage of the main circuit Make sure that the control signal cables and wires will not come into contact with live conductors of the main circuit Failure to observe these precautions could cause electric shock and or an accident ACAUTION Noise may be emitted from the inverter motor and wires Implement appropriate measure to prevent the nearby sensors and devices from malfunctioning due to such noise An accident could occur Table 2 8 lists the symbols names and functions of the control circuit terminals The wiring to the control circuit terminals differs depending upon the setting of the function codes which reflects the use of the inverter Put back the main circuit terminal block cover and then connect wires to the control circuit terminals Route these wires correctly to reduce the influence of noise Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 11 Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Contro
205. it 0 Lower the carrier frequency Y Y 19 5 76 Function automatically 0 Disable 1 Enable Mode selection Bit 1 Detect input phase loss 0 Disable 1 Enable Bit 2 Detect output phase loss 0 Disable 1 Enable Bit 3 Select life judgment threshold of DC link bus capacitor 0 Factory default level 1 User setup level Bit 4 Judge the life of DC link bus capacitor 0 Disable 1 Enable Note Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination A Asia C China E Europe and U USA 1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 15 A codes Motor 2 Parameters Change Refer z Incre Data Default Code Name Data setting range ment Unit when copying setting to l running page A01 Maximum Frequency 2 25 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y Jacu 60 0 E 50 0 A02 Base Frequency 2 25 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y AU 60 0 CE 50 0 A03 Rated Voltage at Base 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input 1 Vv N Y2 ACE 0 Frequency 2 voltage U 230 80 to 240V Output an AVR controlled 460 voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500V Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series A04 Maximum Output 80 to 240V Output an AVR controlled 1 Vv N y2 A 220 Voltage 2 voltage for 200 V class series 380 1
206. its ON OFF Data for HO6 Cooling fan ON OFF 0 Disable Cooling fan always ON 1 Enable ON OFF control effective H07 Acceleration Deceleration Pattern H07 specifies the acceleration and deceleration patterns patterns to control output frequency Linear acceleration deceleration The inverter runs the motor with the constant acceleration and deceleration S curve acceleration deceleration To reduce an impact that acceleration deceleration would make on the machine load the inverter gradually accelerates or decelerates the motor in both starting and ending zones of acceleration deceleration Two types of S curve acceleration deceleration rates are available 5 weak and 10 strong of the maximum frequency which are shared by the four inflection points The acceleration deceleration time command determines the duration of acceleration deceleration in the linear period hence the actual acceleration deceleration time is longer than the reference acceleration deceleration time Outpul frequency Acc time Dec lime Reference Reference Maximum Acc lime Dec time fraquancy om T FONAN Time Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 71 Acceleration deceleration time lt S curve acceleration deceleration weak when the frequency change is 10 or more of the maximum frequency gt Acceleration or deceleration time
207. k the rating plate on the motor and set the following function codes to their nominal ratings e F04 and A02 Base frequency e F05 and A03 Rated voltage at base frequency e P02 and A16 Motor rated capacity e P03 and A17 Motor rated current 2 Selection of tuning process Check the situation of the machine system and select either Tuning while the motor is stopped P04 or A18 1 or Tuning while the motor is running P04 or A18 2 In the case of Tuning while the motor is running P04 or A18 2 also adjust the acceleration and deceleration times F07 and F08 and set the rotation direction properly so that it matches the actual rotation direction of the machine system Selection condition of tuning type Data for Motor parameters P04 A18 subjected to tuning Tuning type Primary resistance Tuning the R1 and X The motor cannot be rotated R1 P07 A21 with the motor being or 50 or more of the rated Leakage reactance Stopped load would be applied to the X P08 A22 motor if rotated Primary resistance Tuning the R1 and X Even if the motor is rotated it R1 P07 A21 with the motor being is safe and no more than 50 Leakage reactance stopped of the rated load would be X P08 A22 Tuning the no load current applied to the motor if rotated i i Tuning with no load will No load current with the motor running at Tuni 1 ll P06 A20 50 of the base frequency obtain the highest pr
208. key will make the change effective and save it into the inverter s memory Impossible m Copying data Connecting an optional remote keypad enables you to copy the function code data stored in the inverter s memory into the keypad s memory refer to Menu 7 Data copying in Programming mode With this feature you can easily transfer all function code data saved in a source inverter to other destination inverters If the specifications of the source and destination inverters differ some code data may not be copied to ensure safe operation of your power system Therefore you need to set up the uncopied code data individually as necessary Whether data will be copied or not is detailed with the following symbols in the Data copy column of the function code tables given below Y Will be copied unconditionally Y1 Will not be copied if the rated capacity differs from the source inverter Y2 Will not be copied if the rated input voltage differs from the source inverter N Will not be copied Function codes marked with an N are not subject to Verify operation either Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 1 It is recommended that you set up those function codes which are not subject to the Copy operation individually using Menu 1 Data setting as necessary 4 Refer to the Remote Keypad Instruction Manual INR SI47 0843 E for details m Using neg
209. l Circuit Terminals Functions Power Power supply 10 VDC for an external frequency command potentiometer supply for Potentiometer 1 to 5 KQ potenti A potentiometer of 1 2 W rating or more should be connected ometer Analog 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input setting voltage voltage 0 to 10 VDC 0 to 100 Normal operation input 10 to 0 VDC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Used for reference signal PID process command or PID feedback signal 3 Used as additional auxiliary setting for various main frequency com mands Input impedance 22 kQ The allowable maximum input is 15 VDC however the voltage higher than 10 VDC is treated as 10 VDC Current 1 The frequency is commanded according to the external analog input input current 4 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation 20 to 4 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 0 to 20 mA DC 0 to 100 Normal operation 20 to 0 mA DC 0 to 100 Inverse operation 2 Used for reference signal PID process command or PID feedback signal 3 Connects PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient thermistor for motor protection 4 Used as additional auxiliary setting for various main frequency com mands Input impedance 250Q The allowable maximum input is 30 mA DC however the current larger than 20 mA DC is treated as 20 mA DC a a D 2 o c lt Coriral crsuit gt Centeal c
210. lacement Parts The inverter consists of many electronic parts including semiconductor devices Table 7 2 lists replacement parts that should be periodically replaced for preventive maintenance Use the lifetime judgment function as a guide These parts are likely to deteriorate with age due to their constitution and properties leading to the decreased performance or failure of the inverter When the replacement is necessary consult your Fuji Electric representative Table 7 2 Replacement Parts Standard replacement intervals parname See Note below DC link bus capacitor 10 years Electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards 10 years Cooling fan 10 years Note These replacement intervals are based on the inverter s service life estimated under the following conditions Ambient temperature 40 C Load factor 80 of the rated current given in parentheses in Chapter 8 Specifications Running 12 hours day In environments with an ambient temperature above 40 C or a large amount of dust or dirt the replacement intervals may be shorter Standard replacement intervals mentioned above are only a guide for replacement not a guaranteed service life Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 3 7 3 1 Judgment on service life 1 Viewing data necessary for judging service life Measurement procedures Through Menu 5 Maintenance Information in P
211. level that guarantees smooth start up and yet does not cause over excitation with no or light load Torque boost per F09 ensures high driving stability since the output voltage remains constant regardless of the load fluctuation Specify the F09 data in percentage to the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 At factory shipment F09 is preset to a level that provides approx 100 of starting torque Note Specifying a high torque boost level will generate a high torque but may cause overcurrent due to over excitation at no load If you continue to drive the motor it may overheat To avoid such a situation adjust torque boost to an appropriate level When the non linear V f pattern and the torque boost are used together the torque boost takes effect below the frequency on the non linear V f pattern s point Gulput vollage Rated voltage al base frequency 1 F05 Increased output valtage using lorque boost 1 09 Non linear Vif paltern 1 Voltage H514 Torque boast 1 FOS Oulput frequency a Non linear WT Base Hz pattern 1 frequency 1 Frequency H30 FH Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 27 Auto torque boost This function automatically optimizes the output voltage to fit the motor with its load Under light load auto torque boost decreases the output voltage to prevent the motor from over excitation Under heavy load it increase
212. lied the inverter will start from the normal starting frequency F23 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 33 During a momentary power failure the motor slows down After power is restored the inverter restarts at the frequency just before the momentary power failure Then the current limiting function works and the output frequency of the inverter automatically decreases When the output frequency matches the motor speed the motor accelerates up to the original output frequency See the figure below In this case the instantaneous overcurrent limiting must be enabled H12 1 Power failure Recovery Fi4 4 DG link bus voltage Output e frequency atte Molor speed FPR Auto reslarting after 4 P momentary power falune ows IPF a Time Undervollage m Searching for molor sperd acceleration Li E Restart mode after momentary power failure Restart time H13 H13 specifies the time period from momentary power failure occurrence until the inverter reacts for restarting process If the inverter starts the motor while motor s residual voltage is still in a high level a large inrush current may flow or an overvoltage alarm may occur due to an occurrence of temporary regeneration For safety therefore it is advisable to set H13 to a certain level so that restart will take place only after the residual voltage has dropped to a low le
213. limiter high has limited tuning operation Other errors An undervoltage or any other alarm has occurred If any of these errors has occurred remove the error cause and perform tuning again or consult your Fuji Electric representative If a filter other than the optional Fuji output filter OFL O00 4A is connected to the inverter s output Secondary circuit the tuning result cannot be assured When replacing the inverter connected with such a filter make a note of the old inverter s settings for the primary resistance R1 leakage reactance X no load current and rated slip frequency and specify those values to the new inverter s function codes Note Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 4 4 1 4 Test run A WARNING If the user configures the function codes wrongly without completely understanding this Instruction Manual and the FRENIC Mini User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine Accident or injury may result Follow the descriptions given in Section 4 1 1 Checking prior to powering on to Section 4 1 3 Preparation before a test then begin the test run of the motor A CAUTION If any abnormality is found in the inverter or motor immediately stop operation and investigate the cause referring to Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Turn the power O
214. ls L1 R L2 S and L3 T L1 L and L2 N for single phase voltage input voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U V and W Turn OFF the power and wait at least five minutes Make sure that the LED monitor is turned OFF Further make sure using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped to the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur Follow the procedure below to solve problems 1 First check that the inverter is correctly wired referring to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals 2 Check whether an alarm code is displayed on the LED monitor If no alarm code appears on the LED moniter Abnormal moter operation Go lo Section 6 29 1 The mator does nol rotate 2 The mater rotates but the speed does nol increase 3 The moter runs in the opposite direction to the command 4 Speed Nuctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed 5 Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates 8 The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified tne 7 The moter does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure 8 The moter does not run as expected Problems with inverter settings Golo Section 6 2 2 1 Nothing appears on the LED monitor 2 T
215. ls on the function codes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 10 Figure 3 4 shows the status transition for Menu 1 Data setting Power ON T Running mode T Programming 3 mode 2 Menu List of function cades Function code data Menu 1 Data settling raa te A eg Ve d Ts Fa r e rae a AP ok Ne La al ta w 4 A oy Y a Ei 7 Erea me rag 1s Foon TELS ta Aa coo fees ia Paes La mn Saa on A et i 33 we wra FA E ae Ee iH oa 2 G oct Ps me og ee 1 a Cee a at HSH H R oco aoe 5 b mm to peta aN fad pe a x A sae vi a ee yee gt on a gt 499 4 lz To Menu 2 Figure 3 4 Data Setting Status Transition Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 11 Basic key operation This section gives a description of the basic key operation following the example of the function code data changing procedure shown in Figure 3 5 This example shows you how to change function code F01 data from the factory default Built in potentiometer POT F01 4 to WALA keys on the built in keypad F01 0 1 When the inverter is powered on it automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the amp key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 With the menu displayed use the A Sand k
216. lso specify or change the reference frequency in the same manner using the x and Se keys E Setting up the PID process command To enable PID control you need to set function code J01 to 1 or 2 LI Refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual for details on the PID control Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 5 Setting the PID process command with the built in potentiometer 1 Set function code E60 to 3 PID process command 1 2 Set function code J02 to 1 PID process command 1 Setting the PID process command with the S and Z keys 1 Set function code J02 to 0 ARS keys on the built in keypad 2 Set the LED monitor to an item other than the speed monitor E43 0 in Running mode In Programming mode or Alarm mode the A keys cannot be used for setting the PID process command so switch to Running mode 3 Press the w or Me key to display the PID process command The lowest digit of the displayed command and the decimal point blink 4 To change the PID process command press the A or key again The new PID process command will be automatically saved into the inverter s memory It is kept there even if the inverter is switched to any other PID process command entry method and then returned to the keypad entry method Also it is kept there even if the inverter is powered off and it will be used as the initial PID process command next time the inverte
217. mands FWD and REV to function codes E98 and E99 gt Connect the external circuit wires to control circuit terminals FWD and REV correctly gt Make sure that the sink source jumper switch on the printed circuit board PCB is properly configured 3 No indication of rotation direction keypad operation Check the input status of the forward reverse rotation direction command with Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad gt Input the rotation direction F02 0 or select the keypad operation with which the rotation direction is fixed F02 2 or 3 4 The inverter could not accept any run commands from the keypad since it was in Programming mode Check which operation mode the inverter is in using the keypad gt Shift the operation mode to Running mode and enter a run command 5 Arun command with higher priority than the one attempted was active and the run command was stopped Refer to the block diagram of the drive command generator and check the higher priority run command with Menu 2 Data Checking and Menu 4 I O Checking using the keypad Refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual Chapter 4 gt Correct any incorrect function code data settings H30 or cancel the higher priority run command The reference frequency was below the starting or stop frequency Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Check t
218. mation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 37 C Tip It is also possible to use an external digital input signal as an Enable DC braking terminal command DCBRK As long as the DCBRK command is ON the inverter performs DC braking regardless of the braking time specified by F22 Turning the DCBRK command ON even when the inverter is in a stopped state activates DC braking This feature allows the motor to be excited before starting resulting in smoother acceleration quicker build up of acceleration torque note In general specify data of function code F20 at a value close to the rated slip frequency of motor If you set it at an extremely high value control may become unstable and an overvoltage alarm may result in some cases ACAUTION The DC brake function of the inverter does not provide any holding mechanism Injuries could occur F23 F25 F39 Starting Frequency 1 Starting Frequency 1 Holding time Stop Frequency Stop Frequency Holding time At the startup of an inverter the initial output frequency is equal to the starting frequency 1 specified by F23 The inverter stops its output when the output frequency reaches the stop frequency specified by F25 Set the starting frequency to a level at which the motor can generate enough torque for startup Generally set the motor s rated slip frequency as the starting frequency In addition to compensate for the delay time for the establishment of
219. mation net 8 1 8 1 2 Three phase 400 V class series O A C E U Type FRN___ _ C2S 40 Applicable motor rating kW 1 when O A C or E Applicable motor rating HP 1 when O U 0 4 1 2 1 3 2 3 3 2 4 8 8 0 Rated capacity kVA 2 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 380 to 480 V with AVR function 1 8 3 1 4 3 6 3 10 5 1 5 2 5 3 7 5 5 9 0 150 of rated output current for 1 min Overload capability 150 of rated output current for 1 min or 200 of rated output current for 0 5 s for the rated current given in parentheses Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Voltage and Voltage 10 to 15 Interphase voltage unbalance 2 or less 5 frequency variations Frequency 5 to 5 Rated SA 0 85 1 6 3 0 4 4 7 3 current A 6 w o DCR 1 7 3 1 5 9 8 2 Rated current A Output Ratings Three phase 380 to 480 V 50 60 Hz Input Ratings Required power supply capacity kVA 0 6 1 1 2 0 2 9 7 Torque 8 100 50 Braking starting frequency 9 0 0 to 60 0 Hz Braking time 0 0 to 30 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 Braking transistor Built in Applicable safety standards UL508C IEC 61800 5 1 2007 under application Enclosure IP20 IEC 60529 1989 UL open type UL50 Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Mass kg 12 1 3 1 7 eA 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter ty
220. mistor mode is enabled function code data H26 gt Set the H26 data to 0 Disable 9 Braking resistor overheated Problem The electronic thermal protection for the braking resistor has been activated Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Braking load is too Reconsider the relationship between the braking load estimated heavy and the real load gt Lower the real braking load gt Review the performance of the current braking resistor and increase the braking capability Modification of related function code data F50 and F51 is also required 2 The specified Recalculate the deceleration torque and time needed for the current deceleration time was load based on the moment of inertia of the load and the too short deceleration time gt Increase the deceleration time F08 E11 Review the performance of the current braking resistor and increase the braking capability Modification of related function code data F50 and F51 is also required 3 Incorrect setting of Recheck the specifications of the braking resistor eed code data E50 gt Review the data of function codes F50 and F51 then reconfigure them Note The inverter issues an overheat alarm of the braking resistor by monitoring the magnitude of the braking load not by measuring its surface temperature When the braking resistor is frequently used so as to exceed the settings made by function codes F50 and F
221. monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution Display resolution 0 001 0 01 gt 0 1 gt 1 To reset the integrated input watt hour and its data set function code E51 to 0 000 When the count exceeds 1 000 000 kWh it will be reset to 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 24 Table 3 15 Maintenance Display Items Continued LED Monitor shows Contents Input watt hour data Description Shows the value expressed by input watt hour kWh x E51 whose data range is 0 000 to 9 999 Unit None Display range 0 001 to 9999 The count cannot exceed 9999 It will be fixed at 9 999 once the calculated value exceeds 9999 Depending on the value of integrated input watt hour data the decimal point on the LED monitor shifts to show it within the LED monitors resolution To reset the integrated input watt hour data set function code E51 to 0 000 No of RS 485 errors Shows the total number of errors that have occurred in RS 485 communication after the power is turned ON Once the count exceeds 9 999 it will be reset to 0 RS 485 error contents Shows the latest error that has occurred in RS 485 communication in decimal format For error contents refer to the RS 485 Communication User s Manual MEH448 Inverter s ROM version Shows the inverter s ROM version as a 4 digit code Key
222. mum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC CJ Using function code C40 expands the input range from 4 to 20 mA DC o 0 to 20 mA DC Enable the sum of voltage 0 to 10 VDC maximum frequency obtained at 10 VDC and current inputs 4 to 20 mA DC or 0 to 20 mA DC maximum frequency obtained at 20 mA DC given to terminals 12 and C1 respectively 4 Using function code C40 expands the input range from 4 to 20 mA DC o 0 to 20 mA DC Note If the sum exceeds the maximum frequency F03 A01 the maximum frequency will apply Enable the built in potentiometer POT Maximum frequency obtained at full scale of the POT Enable UP and DOWN commands assigned to the digital input terminals The UP and DOWN should be assigned to any of digital input terminals X1 to X3 beforehand with any of E01 to E03 data 17 and 18 Note In addition to the frequency command sources described above higher priority command sources including communications link and multistep frequency are provided For details refer to the block diagram given in FRENIC Mini User s Manual 24A7 E 0023 Chapter 4 Section 4 2 Drive Frequency Command Generator Tip For frequency settings made by terminals 12 voltage and C1 current and by the built in potentiometer setting the gain and bias changes the relationship between those frequency settings and the drive frequency Refer to function code F18 for details For the input
223. munications link operation After the motor stops the inverter issues alarm 4 Start Inverters prohibit any run operations and displays check amp on the LED monitor if a run command is present function at the time of any of the following status changes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax Powering up An alarm key turned ON is released or an alarm reset RST is input Link command LE has switched inverter operation and the run command in the source to be switched is active 8 12 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Tuning error 1 Stops the inverter output when a tuning failure interruption or 7 Yes abnormal tuning result is detected during tuning of motor parameters RS 485 Upon detection of an RS 485 communications error the inverter 4 Yes communication stops its output error Data save error If the data could not be saved during activation of the undervoltage amp Yes during protection function the inverter displays the alarm code undervoltage Retry function When the inverter stops due to a trip this function automatically resets the inverter and restarts it The number of retries and the latency between stop and reset can be specified Surge protection Protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear between o
224. n c7 ie 2 LILI i reais na uring En 7 Tuning error see Lilie Overvoltage during ee B9499 rron deceleration ErF Data save error due to AOI undervoltage e LiLid Overvoltage during Eee Mock al constant speed un Mockalaim SE Overheating of the heat 77 Step out detection for sink drive of permanent ES magnet synchron e GHe External thermal relay 2 pi i uel tripped motors LiH Motor protection PTC thermistor At cet Braking resistor overheat fof PID feedback wire break During running or Trip history The causes codes of the last four trips are saved and when tripped displayed The detailed running status data of the last four trips are also saved and displayed E 2 Refer to Section 8 5 Protective Functions fe E Refer to the Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment and Chapter 1 Section 1 4 2 Storage Environment z 2 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 6 8 3 Terminal Specifications 8 3 1 Terminal functions For details about the main and control circuit terminals refer to Chapter 2 Section 2 3 5 and Section 2 3 6 Table 2 8 respectively 8 3 2 Connection diagram in operation by external signal inputs MCCB or RCD ELCB _ Note 1 MC Note 2 DCR Note 3 f DBR Power supply zerean
225. n case of cooling fan failure or overload Braking Protects the braking resistor from overheat in accordance with cot Yes 2 resistor the setting of the electronic thermal overload relay for braking w 2 resistor D It is necessary to set the function code data according to the 6 braking resistor used built in or external Overload Stops the inverter output according to the inverter heat sink Yes protection temperature and the switching element temperature calculated from the output current Note No alarm output depending upon the data setting of the function code 8 11 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net LED Alarm Name Description monitor output displays 30A B C Electronic Stops the inverter output in accordance with the setting of the thf Yes thermal electronic thermal overload relay to protect the motor Ge overload This function protects general purpose motors and inverter motors relay over the entire frequency range as well as protecting the 2nd c 2 5 2 minutes can be set a PTC A PTC thermistor input stops the inverter output for motor iiH Yes 2 thermistor protection 2 A PTC thermistor is connected between terminals C1 and 11 and a resistor is connected between terminals 13 and C1 Overload Outputs a preliminary alarm at a preset level before the motor is early stopped by
226. n is effective only when the inverter starts If you turn on the inverter without removing the ground fault this protection may not work Overvoltage Stops the inverter output upon detection of During chit Yes protection overvoltage 400 VDC for 200 V series and 800 acceleration VDC for 400 V series in the DC link bus During Ti This protection is not assured if excess AC line deceleration voltage is applied inadvertently During running a at constant speed Stopped Undervoltage Stops the inverter output when the DC link bus voltage drops Le Yes protection below the undervoltage level 200 VDC for 200 V series and 400 Note VDC for 400 V series However when F14 4 or 5 no alarm is output even if the DC link bus voltage drops Input phase loss Detects input phase loss stopping the inverter output This 17 Yes protection function prevents the inverter from undergoing heavy stress that may be caused by input phase loss or inter phase voltage unbalance and may damage the inverter If connected load is light or a DC reactor is connected to the inverter this function may not detect input phase loss if any In single phase series of inverters this function is disabled by factory default Output phase Detects breaks in inverter output wiring at the start of running and 7 47 Yes loss protection during running stopping the inverter output 5 Inverter Stops the inverter output upon detecting excess heat sink GH i Yes Q temperature i
227. n overload condition alarm code 7 of the motor so that the user can take an appropriate action before the alarm actually happens The OL signal turns ON when the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 In typical cases set E34 data to 80 to 90 against F11 data Electronic thermal overload protection for motor 1 Overload detection level Specify also the thermal characteristics of the motor with F10 Select motor characteristics and F12 Thermal time constant To utilize this feature you need to assign OL data 7 to any of the digital output terminals Em Current detected and Current detected 2 signals ID and ID2 When the inverter output current has exceeded the level specified by E34 or E37 and it continues longer than the period specified by E35 or E38 the ID or ID2 signal turns ON respectively When the output current drops below 90 of the rated operation level the ID or ID2 turns OFF Minimum width of the output signal 100 ms To utilize this feature you need to assign ID data 37 or ID2 data 38 to any of digital output terminals Oulput Current 1E35 E38 lt ON IDAD2 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 57 m Low current detected IDL This signal turns ON when the output current drops below the low current detection level E34 and remains at the low level for the timer period E35
228. n the case of THR data 1009 is for normal logic Active ON and 9 for negative logic Active OFF Signals having no value in parentheses cannot be used for negative logic N 0 5 44 E10 Acceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start and stop 0 01 6 00 E11 Deceleration Time 2 0 00 to 3600 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the deceleration time requiring external soft start and stop 0 01 6 00 5 25 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 6 E codes continued Code Name Data setting range Incre ment Unit Refer to page Change when running Default setting Data copying E20 E27 Terminal Y1 Function Terminal 30A B C Function Selecting function code data assigns the corresponding function to terminals Y1 and 30A B C as listed below 0 1000 1 1001 2 1002 3 1003 Inverter running Frequency arrival signal RUN FAR Frequency detected FDT Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped Inverter output limiting LU IOL Auto restarting after momentary power failure IPF Motor overload early warning OL 5 1005 6 1006 7 1007 pine TRY 30 1030 LIFE Auto resetting Service lifetime alarm 35 DER Inverter
229. ne of the power lines for the main circuit and the ground Protection Upon detection of a momentary power failure lasting 15 ms or against more this function stops the inverter output momentary If restart after momentary power failure is selected this function power failure invokes a restart process when power has been restored within a predetermined period Overload In the event of overheating of the cooling fan or an overload prevention condition alarm display 4 4 or LiL 4 the output frequency of control the inverter is reduced to keep the inverter from tripping Mock alarm A mock alarm can be generated with keypad operations to check Yes the failure sequence PID feedback Upon detection of a PID feedback wire break this function outputs Yes wire break an alarm detection Step out Upon detection of a step out of PMSM the inverter stops its fru Yes detection 2 output 1 Available only for induction motor drive 2 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later 8 13 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS The table below lists the main peripheral equipment and options that are connected to the FRENIC Mini Use them in accordance with your system requirements L For det
230. net Email info ctiautomation net 2 9 Braking resistor terminals P and DB 1 Connect terminals P and DB of a braking resistor option to terminals P and DB on the main circuit terminal block 2 Arrange the inverter and braking resistor to keep the wiring length to 5 m or less and twist the two wires or route them together in parallel CNote Do not connect a braking resistor to any inverter of FRNO002C2S 2L1 7H or below Even See if connected the braking resistor will not work A WARNING Never insert a braking resistor between terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire When a DC reactor is not to be connected together with the braking resistor 1 Remove the screws from terminals P and P1 together with the jumper bar 2 Connect the wire from terminal P of the braking resistor to terminal P of the inverter and put the jumper bar back into place Then secure the wire and jumper bar with the screw 3 Tighten the screw of terminal P1 on the jumper bar 4 Connect the wire from terminal DB of the braking resistor to the DB of the inverter When connecting a DC reactor together with the braking resistor 1 Remove the screw from terminal P 2 Overlap the DC reactor wire and braking resistor wire P and then secure them to terminal P of the inverter with the screw 3 Connect the wire from terminal DB of the b
231. nfo ctiautomation net 5 35 F18 Bias Frequency command 1 C50 Bias for Frequency 1 Bias base point C32 C34 Analog Input Adjustment for 12 Gain Gain base point C37 C39 Analog Input Adjustment C1 Gain Gain base point When any analog input for frequency command 1 F01 is used it is possible to define the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency by multiplying the gain and adding the bias specified by F18 As shown in the graph below the relationship between the analog input and the reference frequency specified by frequency command 1 is determined by points A and B Point A is defined by the combination of the bias F18 and its base point C50 Point B by the combination of the gain C32 C37 and its base point C34 C39 The combination of C32 and C34 applies to terminal 12 and that of C37 and C339 to terminal C1 Configure the bias F18 and gain C32 C37 assuming the maximum frequency as 100 and the bias base point C50 and gain base point C34 C39 assuming the full scale 10 VDC or 20 mA DC of analog input as 100 Note The analog input less than the bias base point C50 is limited by the bias value F18 e Specifying that the data of the bias base point C50 is equal to or greater than that of each gain base point C34 C39 will be interpreted as invalid so the inverter will reset the reference frequency to 0 Hz Reference frequency Gain C32
232. ng is right gt Match the V f pattern values with the motor ratings Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 4 Possible Causes 9 Bias and gain incorrectly set What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the data of function codes F18 C50 C32 C34 C37 and C39 gt Readijust the bias and gain to appropriate values 3 The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command Possible Causes 1 Wiring to the motor is incorrect What to Check and Suggested Measures Check the wiring to the motor gt Connect terminals U V and W of the inverter to the U V and W terminals of the motor respectively 2 Incorrect connection and settings for run commands and rotation direction command FWD and REV Check the data of function codes E98 and E99 and the connection to terminals FWD and REV gt Correct the data of the function codes and the connection 3 Arun command with fixed rotation direction from the keypad is active but the rotation direction setting is incorrect Check the data of function code F02 Run command gt Change the data of function code F02 to 2 Fund E keys on keypad forward or 3 RUN 0 keys on keypad reverse 4 Speed fluctuation or current oscillation e g hunting occurs during running at constant speed Possible Causes 1 The frequency command fluctuates What
233. ng the reference frequency the inverter decelerates the motor Note according to the deceleration commands even if H11 1 Coast to stop Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 72 H12 Instantaneous Overcurrent Limiting Mode selection H12 specifies whether the inverter invokes the current limit processing or enters the overcurrent trip when its output current exceeds the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level Under the current limit processing the inverter immediately turns OFF its output gate to suppress the further current increase and continues to control the output frequency Data for H12 Function Disable 0 An overcurrent trip occurs at the instantaneous overcurrent limiting level 1 Enable The current limiting operation is effective If any problem occurs when the motor torque temporarily drops during current limiting processing it is necessary to cause an overcurrent trip H12 0 and actuate a mechanical brake at the same time The similar function is the current limiter specified by F43 and F44 The current Note limiter F43 F44 implements the current control by software so an operation delay occurs When you have enabled the current limiter F43 F44 also enable the instantaneous overcurrent limiting with H12 to obtain a quick response current limiting Depending on the load extremely short acceleration time may activate th
234. njuries could occur Maintenance and inspection and parts replacement WARNINGA Turn the power off and wait for at least five minutes before starting inspection Further check that the LED monitor is unlit and check the DC link bus voltage between the P and N terminals to be lower than 25 VDC Otherwise electric shock could occur Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by qualified per sons Take off the watch rings and other metallic matter before starting work e Use insulated tools Otherwise electric shock or injuries could occur Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net vii Disposal A CAUTION e Handle the inverter as an industrial waste when disposing of it Otherwise injuries could occur Others A WARNING Never attempt to modify the inverter Doing so could cause electric shock or injuries GENERAL PRECAUTIONS Drawings in this manual may be illustrated without covers or safety shields for explanation of detail parts Restore the covers and shields in the original state and observe the description in the manual before starting operation Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net viii Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU If installed according to the guidelines given
235. nk bus What to Check and Suggested Measures Check how long it takes for the DC link bus voltage to drop to the preset voltage when the power is turned OFF gt Remove whatever is causing the rapid discharge of the DC link bus voltage After pressing the amp key and resetting the alarm revert the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands PID commands timer values for timer operation specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation BS Inverter affected by strong electrical noise during data saving performed when the power was turned OFF Check if appropriate noise control measures have been implemented e g correct grounding and routing of control and main circuit wires gt Implement noise control measures After pressing the amp and resetting the alarm revert the data of the relevant function codes such as the frequency commands PID commands timer values for timer operation specified through the keypad or the output frequencies modified by the UP DOWN terminal commands back to the original values and then restart the operation 3 The control circuit failed 19 amp Mock alarm Check if amp occurs each time power is switched ON gt The control PCB on which the CPU is mounted is defective Contact your Fuji Electric representative Problem
236. nnected to the grounding terminals correctly See Figure 4 1 WARNING A Do not connect power supply wires to the inverter output terminals U V and W Otherwise the inverter may be broken if you turn the power ON Be sure to connect the grounding wires of the inverter and the motor to the ground electrodes Otherwise electric shock may occur Check the control circuit terminals and main circuit fei terminals for short circuits or ground faults 5 SS LIR LES LXT Check for loose terminals connectors and screws aeei Check that the motor is separated from S mechanical equipment Make sure that all switches of devices connected to the inverter are turned OFF Powering on the Bowe E EAER inverter with any of those switches being ON may sappy E9 rower SUEN Or SERAS cause an unexpected motor operation Check that safety measures are taken against runaway of the equipment e g a defense to prevent people from access to the equipment Figure 4 1 Connection of Main Circuit Terminals 4 1 2 Powering ON and checking WARNING A Be sure to mount the terminal block covers before turning the power ON Do not remove any cover while powering on Do not operate switches with wet hands Otherwise electric shock could occur Turn the power ON and check the following points This is a case when no function code data is changed from the factory defaults 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 72
237. nnection around the control terminals of the inverter and also for connection of the RS 485 signal cable As with the motor clamp the shielding layer firmly to a grounded plate 3 If noise from the inverter exceeds the permissible level enclose the inverter and its peripherals within a metal panel as shown in Figure 11 1 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 2 MCCB or RCDWELCH Note d Metal pare Nolte 2 FRENIC Mini LIRLI U wiih overcurrent protection Shielced cable Figure 11 1 Installing the Inverter with EMC compliant filter into a Metal Panel Note 1 Pass the EMC filter input wires through the ferrite ring reactor for reducing radio noise ACL 40B two times Note 2 Pass the EMC filter output wires shielded cable and grounding wire in a bundle through the ferrite ring reactor for reducing radio noise ACL 40B two times Note 3 Connect the shielding layer of the shielded cable to the motor and panel electrically and ground the motor and panel Note Radiated noise varies greatly depending upon the installation environment When no ferrite ring reactor is used make sure that the radiated noise does not exceed the permissible level Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 11 3 11 2 3 Leakage current of EMC compilaint filter optional Table 11 1
238. nt frequency motor A A Hz PO2 A16 kW PO3 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 21 0 19 13 86 11 81 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 34 0 26 13 25 12 96 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 64 0 50 13 42 13 39 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 15 0 79 10 74 14 38 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 82 1 09 9 23 11 45 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 1 5 3 20 1 43 7 12 12 18 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 72 2 31 7 00 11 85 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 7 70 3 65 6 26 12 16 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 5 5 11 84 5 23 5 72 15 51 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 7 5 15 00 5 94 4 90 15 98 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 21 73 8 41 4 12 16 44 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 28 59 9 50 3 56 17 92 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 35 46 10 17 3 21 18 20 0 87 22 00 to 29 99 22 40 66 11 97 2 96 17 56 0 90 30 00 30 56 15 18 53 2 89 16 37 0 80 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 66 200 V class series for Europe version FRN C2S 7E 230 V 50 Hz rated voltage base frequency Fuji standard 8 series i Nominal Rated No load A 5 Rated slip a applied current current ek A frequency motor A A Hz PO2 A16 kW PO3 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 49 0 46 13 35 11 38 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 73 0 63 12 10 11 83 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 38 1 22 11 95 11 93 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 36 1 91 9 10 12 19 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 58 2 65 7 50 9 30 2 33 1 50 to 2 1
239. ntrol I O signal terminals may be displayed with ON OFF of the LED segment or in hexadecimal display m Display I O signal status with ON OFF of the LED segment As shown in Table 3 13 and the figure below each of the segments a to e on LED1 lights when the corresponding digital input terminal FWD REV X1 X2 or X3 is short circuited with terminal CM or PLC and does not light when it is open Segment a on LED3 lights when the circuit between output terminals Y1 and Y1E is closed and does not light when the circuit is open Segment a on LED4 is for terminal 30ABC Segment a on LED4 lights when the circuit between terminals 30C and 30A is short circuited ON and does not light when it is open Terminal CM if the jumper switch is set for SINK terminal PLC if the jumper switch is set for SOURCE If all terminal input signals are OFF open segment g on all of LEDs 1 to 4 will light ret e Refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES for details C Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 20 Table 3 13 Segment Display for External Signal Information Segment FWD CM or LEO4 LED3 LED LED EWD PLC 2 aT i PP Lr REV CM or H hmi TAARA SSeS X1 CM or a X1 PLC 2 f X2 CM or ae X2 PLC 2 X3 CM or e X3 PLC 2 S dp XF 1 XR 1 RST 1 No corresponding control circui
240. o Pollution Degree 3 or 4 install the inverter in an enclosure of IP54 or higher 5 Install the inverter AC or DC reactor input or output filter in an enclosure with minimum degree of protection of IP2X Top surface of enclosure shall be minimum IP4X when it can be easily accessed to prevent human body from touching directly to live parts of these equipment 6 To make an inverter with no integrated EMC filter conform to the EMC directive it is nec essary to connect an external EMC filter to the inverter and install them properly so that the entire equipment including the inverter conforms to the EMC directive 7 Do not connect any copper wire directly to grounding terminals Use crimp terminals with tin or equivalent plating to connect them 8 To connect the three phase or single phase 200 V class series of inverters to the power supply in Overvoltage Category Ill or to connect the three phase 400 V class series of in verters to the power supply in Overvoltage Category II or Ill a supplementary insulation is required for the control circuitry 9 When using inverters at an altitude of more than 2000 m note that the basic insulation applies to the insulation degree of the control circuitry At an altitude of more than 3000 m inverters cannot be used 10 The power supply mains neutral has to be earthed for the three phase 400 V class inverter 11 The inverter has been tested with IEC61800 5 1 2007 5 2 3 6 3 Short circuit Current Test
241. o the Cumulative run electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards time of electrolytic Unit 1 000 hours Display range 0 01 to 99 99 Aia capacitors on the When the count is less than 99 990 hours Display 0 01 to 99 99 it is printed circuit possible to check data in units of 10 hours 0 01 boards When the count exceeds 99 990 hours it stops and the LED monitor sticks to 99 99 Shows the cumulative run time of the cooling fan If the cooling fan ON OFF control function code H06 is enabled the i time when the fan is stopped is not counted 5 97 Aana run Unit 1 000 hours Display range 0 01 to 99 99 Q cooling fan When the count is less than 99 990 hours Display 0 01 to 99 99 it is possible to check data in units of 10 hours 0 01 When the count exceeds 99 990 hours it stops and the LED monitor sticks to 99 99 Shows the cumulative count of times the inverter is started up i e the number of run commands issued A Number of 1 000 indicates 1 000 times When any number ranging from 0 001 to 5_GE eat s 9 999 is displayed the count increases by 0 001 per startup and up when any number from 10 00 to 65 53 is displayed the count in creases by 0 01 every 10 startups If the count exceeds 65 535 it will be reset to 0 and start over again Shows the input watt hour of the inverter Unit 100 kWh Display range 0 001 to 9999 Depending on the value of input watt hour the decimal point on the 5 7 Input watt hour LED
242. oked Decelerate to stop control regenerates kinetic energy from the load s moment of inertia slowing down the motor and continuing the deceleration operation After decelerate to stop operation an undervoltage alarm LLI is issued Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Enable restart Restart at the frequency at which the power failure occurred for general loads As soon as the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage detection level due to a momentary power failure the inverter saves the output frequency being applied at that time and shuts down the output so that the motor enters a coast to stop state If a run command has been input restoring power restarts the inverter at the output frequency saved during the last power failure processing This setting is ideal for applications with a moment of inertia large enough not to slow down the motor quickly such as fans even after the motor enters a coast to stop state upon occurrence of a momentary power failure Enable restart Restart at the starting frequency for low inertia load After a momentary power failure restoring power and then entering a run command restarts the inverter at the starting frequency specified by function code F23 This setting is ideal for heavy load applications such as pumps having a small moment of inertia in which the motor speed quickly goes down to zero as soon as it enters a coast to stop state upon occu
243. ol J01 1 or 2 The timer for timer operation appears only when timer operation is enabled C21 1 When the PID control or timer operation is disabled appears instead Note 4 When the LED monitor displays a PID command or its output amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter blinks Note 5 When the LED monitor displays a PID feedback amount the dot decimal point attached to the lowest digit of the 7 segment letter lights Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 4 3 3 2 Setting up reference frequency and PID process command You can set up the desired frequency command and PID process command by using the potenti ometer and x and 4 keys on the keypad You can also set up the reference frequency as fre quency load shaft speed line speed and constant rate of feeding time by setting function code E48 E Setting up the reference frequency Using the built in potentiometer factory default Setting function code F01 to 4 Built in potentiometer POT factory default allows you to specify the reference frequency using the potentiometer Using the Z and es keys 1 Set function code F01 to OAS keys on the built in keypad In Programming mode or Alarm mode the IS keys cannot be used for setting the reference frequency so switch to Running mode 2 Press the x or Oe key to display the reference frequ
244. on all the phases will be lost In such a case this protection feature does not work Judgment threshold on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 Bit 3 is used to select the threshold for judging the life of the DC link bus capacitor between factory default setting and your own choice Note Before specifying the threshold of your own choice measure and confirm the reference level in advance For details refer to Chapter 7 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 76 Judgment on the life of DC link bus capacitor Bit 4 Whether the DC link bus capacitor has reached its life is determined by measuring the length of time for discharging after power OFF The discharging time is determined by the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor and the load inside the inverter Therefore if the load inside the inverter fluctuates significantly the discharging time cannot be accurately measured and as a result it may be mistakenly determined that the life has been reached To avoid such an error you can disable the judgment on the life of the DC link bus capacitor Since load may vary significantly in the following cases disable the judgment on the life during operation Either conduct the measurement with the judgment enabled under appropriate conditions during periodical maintenance or conduct the measurement under the operating conditions matching the actual ones Aremote k
245. on function built into the inverter or with the terminal signal line 2 Stop the inverter operation in an emergency when the inverter cannot interpret the stop command due to internal external circuit failures 3 Cut off the inverter from the power source when the MCCB inserted in the power source side cannot cut it off for maintenance or inspection purpose If you are to use the MC for this purpose only it is recommended that you use an MC capable of turning the MC on off manually When your system requires the motor s driven by the inverter to be started stopped with the MC the frequency of the starting stopping operation should be once or less per hour The more frequent the operation the shorter operation life of the MC and capacitor s used in the DC link bus due to thermal fatigue caused by the frequent charging of the current flow If this is not necessary start stop the motor with the terminal commands FWD REV and or HLD or with the keypad E At the output secondary side Prevent externally turned around current from being applied to the inverter power output terminals U V and W unexpectedly An MC should be used for example if a circuit that switches the motor driving source between the inverter output and commercial factory power lines is connected to the inverter As application of high voltage external current to the inverter s secondary output circuits may break the IGBTs MCs should be used in the power control
246. or C37 a Point B Bias F18 Point A Analog input 0 Bias Gain 100 base base point point C50 C34 or C39 Example Setting the bias gain and their base points when the reference frequency 0 to 100 follows the analog input of 1 to 5 VDC to terminal 12 in frequency command 1 Reference frequency Gain C32 z i 1 100 Point E Bias F18 0 Analog input o 1 10 aaa 100 Bias Gain base base point 50 paint C34 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 36 Point A To set the reference frequency to 0 Hz for an analog input being at 1 V set the bias to 0 F18 0 Since 1 V is the bias base point and it is equal to 10 of 10 V full scale set the bias base point to 10 C50 10 Point B To make the maximum frequency equal to the reference frequency for an analog input being at 5 V set the gain to 100 C32 100 Since 5 V is the gain base point and it is equal to 50 of 10 V full scale set the gain base point to 50 C34 50 Note The setting procedure for specifying a gain or bias alone without changing any base points is the same as that of Fuji conventional inverters F20 to F22 DC Braking 1 Braking starting frequency Braking level and Braking time H95 DC Braking Braking response mode F20 through F22 specify the DC braking that prevents motor 1 from running by inertia during decelerate to stop operat
247. or item compensation 1 Output frequency After slip compensation 2 Reference frequency 4 Load shaft speed in r min 5 Line speed in m min 6 Constant feeding rate time E50 Coefficient for Speed 0 01 to 200 00 2 0 01 Y Y 30 00 5 58 Indication E51 Display Coefficient for 0 000 Cancel reset 0 001 to 9999 0 001 Y Y 0 010 Input Watt hour Data E52 Keypad 0 Function code data editing mode Y Y 0 5 59 Menu display mode Menu 1 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 2 Full menu mode Menus 0 through 6 Note E45 E46 and E47 appear on the LED monitor but cannot be used by this inverter 2 When you make settings from tl display Example If the setting range is from 200 00 to 200 00 the incremental unit is 1 for 200 to 100 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 100 0 to 200 0 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 0 01 and for 0 00 to 99 99 3 The significant figure is in three digits so the incremental unit changes depending upon the magnitude of absolute values Example The incremental unit is 10 for 1000 to 9990 1 for 999 to 100 and for 100 to 999 0 1 for 99 9 to 10 0 and for 10 0 to 99 9 and 0 01 for 9 99 to 9 99 e keypad the incremental unit is restricted by the number of digits that the LED monitor can Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 8 E codes continued h
248. ote To configure this kind of circuit use a highly reliable relay Recommended product Fuji control relay Model HH54PW lt Gontrol arcuit z lt Control circuit Ce ii A a oy PLC gt a PLE SINK SOURCE SE gas aun TER oes AREE anig i Photecoupler Photocoupler HA REV PAD RE ta 5 EM TIEM a With a jumper applied to SINK b With a jumper applied to SOURCE Figure 2 7 Circuit Configuration Using a Relay Contact m Using a programmable logic controller PLC to turn X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 8 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a programmable logic controller PLC to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV ON or OFF Circuit a has a connecting jumper applied to SINK whereas circuit b has one that is applied to SOURCE In circuit a below short circuiting or opening the transistor s open collector circuit in the PLC using an external power source turns control signal X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV ON or OFF When using this type of circuit observe the following Connect the node of the external power source which should be isolated from the PLC s power to terminal PLC of the inverter Do not connect terminal CM of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC z 5 Q T 2 2 Q Control circuit gt Contral crcud gt PLC BINK it SOURCE 7 s as aKa ae 5 OENE AAT A Ixi x3 FWD
249. own in Figure 2 11 allows you to customize the specifications of the digital I O terminals and the RS 485 communication terminating resistor To access the jumper switches remove the terminal block covers For details on how to remove the terminal block covers refer to Section 2 3 1 Table 2 9 lists function of each jumper switch Table 2 9 Function of Jumper Switches Switch Function SINK SOQURCE switch for digital input terminals e To use digital input terminals X1 to X3 FWD and REV in the SINK mode set a jumper in the sink position to use them in the SOURCE mode set a jumper in the source position See Figure 2 11 To switch between SINK and SOURCE modes use a mini needle nose pliers or the similar tool to change the mounting position of the jumper Terminating resistor ON OFF switch for RS 485 communication To connect an optional remote keypad set a jumper in the OFF position factory default If the inverter is connected to the RS 485 communications network as a termi nating device set a jumper in the ON position e To switch the terminating resistor ON and OFF use a mini needle nose pliers or the similar tool to change the mounting position of the jumper Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 18 Figure 2 11 shows the locations of jumper switches and the RJ 45 connector
250. pad s ROM version Shows the keypad s ROM version as a 4 digit code Available only when an optional remote keypad is connected Cumulative run time of motor Shows the content of the cumulative run time of the motor The display method is the same as for Cumulative run time 5_ 7 7 Remaining time before the next motor 1 main tenance Shows the time remaining before the next maintenance which is estimated by subtracting the cumulative run time of motor 1 from the maintenance interval specified by H78 This function applies to motor 1 only Display range 0 to9999 The x10 LED turns ON Time remaining before the next maintenance hour Displayed value x 10 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Remaining startup times before the next maintenance Shows the startup times remaining before the next maintenance which is estimated by subtracting the number of startups from the preset startup count for maintenance specified by H79 This function applies to motor 1 only The display method is the same as for 5_ 75 above Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 25 3 4 6 Reading alarm information Alarm Information Menu 6 Alarm information in Programming mode shows the causes of the past 4 alarms as an alarm code Further it is also possible to display alarm information tha
251. pe is FRNO011C2S 4E 1 Fuji 4 pole standard motors 2 Refers to the rated capacity assuming the rated output voltage as 440 V 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage Max voltage V Min voltage V 3 phase average voltage V DC braking x 67 Refer to IEC 61800 3 2004 5 Interphase voltage unbalance f this value is 2 to 3 use an optional AC reactor ACR 6 Refers to the estimated value to apply when the power supply capacity is 500 kVA inverter capacity x 10 when he inverter capacity exceeds 50 kVA and the inverter is connected to the X 5 power supply 7 Refers to the value to apply when a DC reactor DCR is used 8 Refers to the average braking torque to apply when the motor running alone decelerates from 60 Hz with the AVR control being OFF It varies with the efficiency of the motor 9 Available only for induction motor drive Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 2 Phone 8 1 3 Single phase 200 V class series O A C E U Type FRN L ___ C2S 70 Applicable mo 1 or rating kW A Cor when 0 1 0 2 0 4 Applicable moi 1 or rating HP when U 1 8 1 4 1 2 Rated capacit
252. ple Load shaft speed Displayed data x 10 r min The command is displayed through the use of function code E40 PID process and E41 data PID display coefficients A and B command Display value PID process command x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears This value is displayed through the use of function code E40 and PID feedback E41 data PID display coefficients A and B value Display value PID feedback value x Coefficient A B B If PID control is disabled appears Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 16 m Displaying running status To display the running status in hexadecimal format each state has been assigned to bits 0 to 15 as listed in Table 3 9 Table 3 10 shows the relationship between each of the status assignments and the LED monitor display Table 3 11 gives the conversion table from 4 bit binary to hexadecimal Notation Table 3 9 Running Status Bit Allocation Content 1 when function code data is being written Notation Content 1 under voltage limiting control Always 0 Always 0 Always 0 1 when the DC link bus voltage is higher than the undervoltage level 1 when communication is en abled when ready for run and frequency commands via com munications link Always 0 1 when an alarm has occu
253. pply has required a large starting current causing a temporary voltage drop What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage and check the voltage fluctuation gt Reconsider the power system configuration Inverter s inrush current caused the power voltage drop because the power supply transformer capacity was insufficient g 4 d m Input phase loss Problem Possible Causes 1 Main circuit power input wires broken Check if the alarm occurs when a molded case circuit breaker MCCB residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with overcurrent protection or magnetic contactor MC is turned ON gt Reconsider the capacity of the power supply transformer Input phase loss occurred or interphase voltage unbalance rate was large What to Check and Suggested Measures Measure the input voltage gt Repair or replace the input wires 2 Screws on the main circuit power input terminals are loose Check if the screws on the inverter input terminals have become loose gt Tighten the terminal screws to the recommended torque 3 Interphase voltage unbalance between three phases was too large Measure the input voltage gt Connect an AC reactor ACR to lower the voltage unbalance between input phases gt Raise the inverter capacity 4 Overload cyclically occurred Measure the ripple wave of the DC link bus volt
254. pply to which the product is to be connected Otherwise fire or an accident could occur Do not connect the power source wires to output terminals U V and W Do not connect a braking resistor to between terminals P and N P1 and N P and P1 DB and N or P1 and DB Doing so could cause fire or an accident Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 6 2 3 5 Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals Follow the procedure below Figure 2 3 illustrates the wiring procedure with peripheral equipment Wiring procedure Grounding terminal G Inverter output terminals U V and W and grounding terminal G DC reactor connection terminals P1 and P 2 Braking resistor connection terminals P and DB 2 DC link bus terminals P and N 2 Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L and L2 N 1 Use either one of these two grounding terminals on the main circuit terminal block 2 Perform wiring as necessary O9 O8OOO In the case of FRNO006 C2S 20 LR LUS Lat Pi PE Qe 5 w Other inverter y The box O replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination Power supply Molded case circuit breaker MCCB CAUTION The above is or an illustration Do not Residual current operated connect
255. proved in advance Submersible mo tors and pumps These motors have a larger rated current than gen eral purpose motors Select an inverter whose rated output current is greater than that of the motor These motors differ from general purpose motors in thermal characteristics Set a low value in the thermal time constant of the motor when setting the electronic thermal function Brake motors For motors equipped with parallel connected brakes their braking power must be supplied from the input primary circuit If the brake power is connected to the inverter s output secondary circuit by mistake the brake will not work Do not use inverters for driving motors equipped with se ries connected brakes Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net xi In running special motors Geared motors If the power transmission mechanism uses an oil lubricated gearbox or speed changer reducer then continuous motor operation at low speed may cause poor lubrication Avoid such operation Synchronous mo tors It is necessary to take special measures suitable for this motor type For details about the PMSM drive refer to Chapter 5 Section 5 3 Notes in Driving PMSM Single phase motors Single phase motors are not suitable for inverter driven variable speed operation Use three phase motors Even if a single phase power supply is available
256. r 1 PID control Automatic deceleration Overload prevention control Auto energy saving operation 1 Cooling fan ON OFF control Offline tuning 1 Rotation direction limitation and 2nd motor settings 1 Available only for induction motor drive 2 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 5 Item Explanation During running stop Speed monitor output current A output voltage V input power kW PID command value PID feedback value PID output timer s and input watt hour kWh Select the speed monitor to be displayed from the following Output frequency before slip compensation Hz output frequency after slip compensation Hz reference frequency Hz load shaft speed min line speed m min constant feeding rate time min Speed monitor can display the speed specified with E48 When tripped Displays the cause of trip by codes as follows GO Overcurrent during ZL Motor overload ____ acceleration ALE Motor 2 overload ae ga i poe VOEE earen Sng ALLI Inverter unit overload ration ARS eceleration e Er Memory error e Liz Overcurrent at constant co speed Ere Keypad Input phase l ss communications error Ln u PEE ase e id Undervoltage s a CPU emor 5 FFL Output phase loss e amp Operation procedure a DORE rror y e ZL i Overvoltage duri
257. r higher you may get a little or no energy saving advantage The auto energy saving operation is designed for use with the frequency lower than the base frequency If the frequency becomes higher than the base frequency the auto energy saving operation will be invalid Note e Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P02 P03 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 F10 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Select motor characteristics F11 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Overload detection level F12 Electronic Thermal Overload Protection for Motor 1 Thermal time constant F10 through F12 specify the thermal characteristics of the motor for its electronic thermal overload protection that is used to detect overload conditions of the motor F10 selects the motor cooling mechanism to specify its characteristics F11 specifies the overload detection current and F12 specifies the thermal time constant Note Thermal characteristics of the motor specified by F10 and F12 are also used for the overload early warning Even if you need only the overload early warning set these characteristics data to these function codes To disable the electronic thermal overload protection set function code F11 to 0 00
258. r is an alphabet that identifies its group and the following two letters are numerals that identify each individual code in the group The function codes are classified into eight groups Fundamental Functions F codes Extension Terminal Functions E codes Control Functions C codes Motor 1 Parameters P codes High Performance Functions H codes Motor 2 Parameters A codes Application Functions J codes and Link Functions y codes To determine the property of each function code set data to the function code The following descriptions supplement those given in the function code tables on page 5 3 and subsequent pages m Changing validating and saving function code data when the motor is running Function codes are indicated by the following based on whether they can be changed or not when the inverter is running Notation Change when running Validating and saving function code data Possible If the data of the codes marked with Y is changed the change will immediately take effect however the change is not saved into the inverter s memory To save the change press the ee key If you press the amp key without pressing the key to exit the current state then the changed data will be discarded and the previous data will take effect for the inverter operation Possible The data of the codes marked with Y can be changed with the wx and MA keys regardless of whether the motor is running or not Pressing the ee
259. r is powered on Gip Even if multistep frequency is selected as a PID process command SS4 ON you still can set the process command using the keypad When function code J02 data has been set to any value except 0 pressing the A or we key displays the currently selected PID process command but does not allow any change of the setting When a PID process command is displayed the decimal point next to the lowest digit on the LED display blinks to distinguish it from the regular frequency setting When a PID feedback amount is displayed the decimal point is lit Blinking Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 6 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor By factory default pressing the fut key starts running the motor in the forward direction and pressing the Greet key decelerates the motor to stop The fant key is enabled only in Running mode By changing the setting of function code F02 you can change the starting direction of motor rotation for example you can have the motor start running in the reverse direction or in accordance with the wiring connection at the terminal block m Operational relationship between function code F02 Operation method and fut key Table 3 4 lists the relationship between function code F02 settings and the Runt key which determines the motor rotation direction Table 3 4 Rotation Direction of Motor Specified by F02
260. raking resistor to terminal DB of the inverter 4 Do not use the jumper bar DC link bus terminals P and N These are provided for the DC link bus powered system Connect these terminals with terminals P and N of other inverters Note Consult your Fuji Electric representative if these terminals are to be used Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 10 Main circuit power input terminals L1 R L2 S and L3 T for three phase voltage input or L1 L and L2 N for single phase voltage input 1 For safety make sure that the molded case circuit breaker MCCB or magnetic contactor MC is turned off before wiring the main circuit power input terminals 2 Connect the main circuit power supply wires L1 R L2 S and L3 T or L1 L and L2 N to the input terminals of the inverter via an MCCB or residual current operated protective device RCD earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB and MC if necessary It is not necessary to align phases of the power supply wires and the input terminals of the inverter with each other With overcurrent protection C Tip It is recommended that a magnetic contactor be inserted which can be manually activated Xt This is to allow you to disconnect the inverter from the power supply in an emergency e g when the protective function is activated so as to prevent a failure or accident from causing the secondary problems 2 3 6 W
261. rated current on the nameplate if the already set data Motor Rated current differs from the rated current printed on the nameplate of the motor Upon completion of the initialization the H03 data reverts to 0 factory default If the PO2 or A16 data is set to a value other than the nominal applied motor rating data initialization with H03 internally converts the specified value forcedly to the equivalent nominal applied motor rating see the tables on the next page When a PMSM is selected P99 20 or 21 initializing motor parameters by setting the H03 data to 2 reverts function code data for both IM and PMSM to factory defaults Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 64 m When Fuji standard 8 series IM P99 0 or A39 0 or other motors P99 4 or A39 4 are selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables 200 V class series for Asia version FRN C2S 2A FRN___ _C2S 7A 220 V 60 Hz rated voltage base frequency Fuji standard 8 series Nominal Rated No load 6 Rated slip w oR oX applied current current frequency motor A A Hz Motor capacity kW PO2 A16 kW PO3 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 40 0 37 11 40 9 71 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 1 0 62 0 50 10 74 10 50 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 2 1 18 0 97 10 69 10 66 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 2 10 1 52 8 47 11 34 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 3 29 2 11 7 20
262. rcuit breaker RCD Residual current operated protective device ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U 4 0 kW for the EU The inverter type is FRN0011C2S 4E 1 The frame size and model of the MCCB or RCD ELCB with overcurrent protection will vary depending on the power transformer capacity Refer to the related technical documentation for details 2 The recommended wire size for main circuits is for the 70 C 600V PVC wires used at an ambient temperature of 40 C 3 In the case of no DC reactor the wire sizes are determined on the basis of the effective input current calculated under the condition that the power supply capacity and impedance are 500 kVA and 5 respectively Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net x E Precautions for use In running general purpose motors Driving a 400 V general purpose motor When driving a 400 V general purpose motor with an inverter using extremely long wires damage to the insulation of the motor may occur Use an output circuit filter OFL if neces sary after checking with the motor manufacturer Fuji motors do not require the use of output circuit filters because of their good insulation Torque charac teristics and temperature rise Wh
263. re using a multimeter or a similar instrument that the DC link bus voltage between the terminals P and N has dropped below the safe level 25 VDC or below Electric shock may occur e Maintenance inspection and parts replacement should be made only by authorized persons Take off the watch rings and other metallic objects before starting work Use insulated tools Never modify the inverter Electric shock or injuries could occur 7 1 Daily Inspection Visually inspect the inverter for operation errors from the outside without removing the covers when the inverter is ON or operating Check that the expected performance satisfying the standard specifications is obtained Check that the surrounding environment satisfies the requirements given in Chapter 2 Section 2 1 Operating Environment Check that the LED monitor on the keypad displays normally Check for abnormal noise odor or excessive vibration Check for traces of overheat discoloration and other defects 7 2 Periodic Inspection Perform periodic inspection according to the items listed in Table 7 1 Before performing periodic inspection be sure to stop the motor shut down the power to the inverter and then remove the terminal block covers Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Environment 1 Check the ambient temperature 1 Check visually or 1 The standard humidi
264. reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase 11 L Inverter overload Problem Temperature inside inverter has risen abnormally Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 1 Temperature around the Measure the temperature around the inverter inverter exceeded the inverter s specification range gt Lower the temperature e g ventilate the panel where the inverter is mounted S Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 A05 does not specified F09 A05 stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the torque boost F09 A05 3 The specified Recalculate the acceleration deceleration torque and time needed acceleration for the current load based on the moment of inertia of the load and deceleration time was the acceleration deceleration time gp Short gt Increase the acceleration deceleration time F07 F08 E10 E11 4 Load was too heavy Measure the output current gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 to reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase gt Decrease the motor sound Carrier frequency F26 gt Enable overload prevention control H70 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 17 Possible Causes 5 Ventilation paths are
265. res Isolate the main circuit wires from the control circuit wires and other device wires Put the main circuit wires through a metal conduit and connect the pipe to the ground near the inverter Mount the inverter on the metal switchboard and connect the whole board to the ground Connect a noise filter to the inverter power wires 3 When implementing measures against noise generated from peripheral equipment For the control signal wires use twisted or shielded twisted wires When using shielded twisted wires connect the shield of the shielded wires to the common terminals of the control circuit Connect a surge absorber in parallel with a coil or solenoid of the magnetic contactor 3 Leakage current A high frequency current component generated by insulated gate bipolar transistors IGBTs switching on off inside the inverter becomes leakage current through stray capacitance of inverter input and output wires or a motor If any of the problems listed below occurs take appropriate measures against them Table 2 10 Leakage Current Countermeasures Problem Measures An earth leakage circuit 1 Decrease the carrier frequency breaker that is connected 2 Make the wires between the inverter and motor shorter eee primary side 3 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker ELCB with lower ppo i sensitivity than the one currently used With overcurrent protection 4 Use an earth leakage circuit breaker that features me
266. responsibility of Fuji Electric Fuji Electric will replace or repair the part of the product that has broken down free of charge at the place where the product was purchased or where it was delivered However if the following cases are applicable the terms of this warranty may not apply The breakdown was caused by inappropriate conditions environment handling or use methods etc which are not specified in the catalog operation manual specifications or other relevant documents The breakdown was caused by the product other than the purchased or delivered Fuji s product The breakdown was caused by the product other than Fuji s product such as the customer s equipment or software design etc Concerning the Fuji s programmable products the breakdown was caused by a program other than a program supplied by this company or the results from using such a program The breakdown was caused by modifications or repairs affected by a party other than Fuji Electric The breakdown was caused by improper maintenance or replacement using consumables etc specified in the operation manual or catalog etc The breakdown was caused by a science or technical problem that was not foreseen when making practical application of the product at the time it was purchased or delivered The product was not used in the manner the product was originally intended to be used The breakdown was caused by a reason which is not this company s responsibility such as lig
267. ring f 1 i Ale i i O checking 1 Menu 4 7 1 i no i i Maintenance info i i Menu 5 Erne i i A Alarm info LOO Menu 6 ee i i i i i i i Displayed only when a remote keypad option is set up for use Figure 3 3 Menu Transition in Programming Mode Limiting menus to be displayed The menu driven system has a limiter function specified by function code E52 that limits menus to be displayed for the purpose of simple operation The factory default is to display Menu 1 Data setting only allowing no switching to any other menu Table 3 6 Function Code E52 Keypad Mode Selection Function code data E52 Menus selectable 0 Function code data editing mode Menu 1 Data setting factory default 1 Function code data check mode Menu 2 Data checking 2 Full menu mode Menu 1 through 6 Note Menu 7 appears only when the remote keypad option is connected Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 9 Ti Ifthe full menu mode is selected pressing the wz or Z key will cycle through the menus With the ee key you can select the desired menu item Once the entire menu has been cycled through the display will return to the first menu item 3 4 1 Setting up the function codes Data Setting Menu 1 Data setting in Programming mode allows you to set f
268. rm reset is made with the operation signal turned on a sudden start will occur Ensure that the operation signal is turned off in advance Otherwise an accident could occur Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net vi WARNINGA e If you enable the restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 then the inverter automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting If you set the function codes wrongly or without completely understanding this instruction manual and the FRENIC Mini User s Manual the motor may rotate with a torque or at a speed not permitted for the machine An accident or injuries could occur Do not touch the inverter terminals while the power is applied to the inverter even if the inverter stops Doing so could cause electric shock ACAUTION Do not turn the main circuit power on or off in order to start or stop inverter operation Doing so could cause failure Do not touch the heat sink or braking resistor because they become very hot Doing so could cause burns Setting the inverter to high speeds is easy Before changing the frequency speed setting check the specifications of the motor and machinery The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding means I
269. rmal overload protection facility by setting F50 and F51 data to the discharging capability and allowable average loss values listed below respectively Braking resistor Continuous braking Intermittent braking Power g Resistance 100 braking torque Period 100 s or less supply Inverter type Q Discharging Braking Allowable Dut voltage Type Qty capability time average loss ED kWs s kW FRN0004C2S20 DB0 75 2 100 9 0 044 22 Three FRNOoosC2s 201 17 45 0 068 18 h FRN0010C2S 20 4 07 1 pase 0010C2S DB2 2 2 40 3 0 075 0 FRN0012C2S 20 33 30 0 077 T FRN0020C2S 20 DB3 7 2 33 37 20 0 093 5 FRNQO02C2S40 DBO 75 4 200 9 0 044 22 Three FRN0004C2S 40 i 17 45 0 068 18 ha FRN 28 40 4 07 1 AN k 0005C2S DB2 2 4 160 3 0 075 0 FRN0007C2S 40 33 30 0 077 7 FRNOO11C2S 40 DB3 7 4 130 37 20 0 093 5 FRN0004C2s 70 044 22 Single pooaues DBO 75 2 100 3 9 0 hase FRN0006C2S 70 17 45 0 068 18 200 V FRN0010C2S 70 DB2 2 2 40 34 0 075 10 FRN0012C2S 70 33 30 0 077 7 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 43 Compact models When using the compact models of braking resistor TK8OW 120Q or TK80W100Q set F50 to 7 and F51 to 0 033 10 ED models
270. rmalities Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 2 Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check part Check item How to inspect Evaluation criteria Magnetic 1 Check for chatters during 1 Hearing 1 2 contactor operation inspection No abnormalities and relay 2 Check for rough contacts 2 Visual inspection Main circuit Printed 1 Check for loose screws and 1 Retighten 1 2 3 4 circuit connectors No abnormalities boards 2 Check for abnormal odor and 2 Olfactory and discoloration visual inspection 3 Check for cracks breakage 3 4 deformation and remarkable rust 4 Check the capacitors for electrolyte leaks and deformation E Pi rs o E c fo Visual inspection Cooling fan 1 Check for abnormal noise and 1 Auditory and 1 Smooth rotation excessive vibration visual inspection or turn manually be sure to turn the power OFF 2 Check for loose bolts 2 Retighten 2 3 3 Check for discoloration caused by 3 Visual inspection No abnormalities overheat Cooling system Ventilation Check the heat sink intake and Visual inspection No abnormalities path exhaust ports for clogging and foreign materials Remove dust accumulating on the inverter with a vacuum cleaner If the inverter is stained wipe it off with a chemically neutral cloth 7 3 List of Periodical Rep
271. rn only H50 to H53 Starting frequency Starting frequency holding time not supported F24 Stop frequency Stop frequency holding time not supported F39 Overload early warning Disabled E34 and E35 UP DOWN control Disabled Fixed at default setting 0 H61 PID control Disabled J01 Braking signal Disabled J68 to J72 Software current limiter Disabled F43 and F44 Rotation direction limitation Disabled H08 Not To run the 2nd motor with the M2 M1 terminal command and a run command e g FWD the input of the M2 M1 should not be delayed 10 ms or more from that of the run command If the delay exceeds 10 ms the 1st motor will be driven by default m Enable DC braking DCBRK Function code data 13 This terminal command gives the inverter a DC braking command through the inverter s digital input Refer to the descriptions of F20 to F22 m UP Increase output frequency and DOWN Decrease output frequency commands UP and DOWN Function code data 17 18 Frequency setting When the UP DOWN control is selected for frequency setting with a run command ON turning the UP or DOWN terminal command ON causes the output frequency to increase or decrease respectively within the range from 0 Hz to the maximum frequency as listed below UP DOWN Data 17 Data 18 Function Keep the current output frequency Increase the output frequency with the acceleration time currently specified
272. rogramming mode you can view on the keypad various data as a guideline necessary for judging whether key components such as the DC link bus capacitor electrolytic capacitors on the printed circuit boards and cooling fan are approaching their service life T 1 Measuring the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor in comparison with initial one at shipment Measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitor according to the procedure given below The result will be displayed on the keypad as a ratio to the initial capacitance at the time of factory shipment Toman cscs A cs cn E Procedure for measuring capacitance 1 To ensure validity in the comparative measurement put the condition of the inverter back to the state at factory shipment e Remove the option card if already in use from the inverter e Incase another inverter is connected via the DC link bus to the P and N terminals of the main circuit disconnect the wires You do not need to disconnect a DC reactor optional if any e If the standard keypad has been replaced with an optional remote keypad after the purchase put back the original standard keypad e Turn OFF all the digital input signals fed to terminals FWD REV and X1 through X3 of the control circuit e f a potentiometer is connected to terminal 13 disconnect it e If an external apparatus is attached to terminal PLC disconnect it e Ensure that
273. rred 1 when the inverter output is shut down 1 during deceleration 1 during DC braking 1 during acceleration 1 during running in the reverse direction LED No 1 under current limiting control Table 3 10 Running Status Display 1 during running in the forward direction Bit 15 Notation BUSY Binary 1 Xx Hexa decimal See Table 3 11 Hexa decimal on the LED monitor LED4 LED LEDS LED Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 17 Hexadecimal expression A 4 bit binary number can be expressed in hexadecimal format 1 hexadecimal digit Table 3 11 shows the correspondence between the two notations The hexadecimals are shown as they appear on the LED monitor Table 3 11 Binary and Hexadecimal Conversion Binary Binary Eight s Four s Two s One s Hexadecimal Eight s Fours Two s One s Hexadecimal place place place place place place place place 0 0 0 0 a 1 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 4 0 0 1 0 g 1 0 1 0 A 0 0 1 1 3 1 0 1 1 h 0 1 0 0 4 1 1 0 0 F 0 1 0 1 5 1 1 0 1 J 0 1 1 0 6 1 1 1 0 E 0 1 1 1 7 1 1 1 1 E Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 18 3 4
274. rrence of a momentary power failure A WARNING Otherwise an accident could occur If you enable the Restart mode after momentary power failure Function code F14 4 or 5 the inverter automatically restarts the motor running when the power is restored Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 32 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Basic operation The inverter recognizes a momentary power failure upon detecting the condition that DC link bus voltage goes below the undervoltage detection level while the inverter is running If the load of the motor is light and the duration of the momentary power failure is extremely short the voltage drop may not be great enough for a momentary power failure to be recognized and the motor may continue to run uninterrupted Upon recognizing a momentary power failure the inverter enters the restart mode after a recovery from momentary power failure and prepares for restart When power is restored the inverter goes through an initial charging stage and enters the ready to run state When a momentary power failure occurs the power supply voltage for external circuits such as relay sequence circuits may also drop so as to turn the run command OFF In consideration of such a situation the inverter waits 2 seconds for a run comman
275. rs indicated in Table 7 4 when measuring with meters for commercial frequencies The power factor cannot be measured by a commercially available power factor meter that measures the phase difference between the voltage and current To obtain the power factor measure the power voltage and current on each of the input and output sides and use the following formula m Three phase input m Single phase input Electric power W x 100 pawer factors Electric power W Power factor Pa A al 3xVoltage V xCurrent A Voltage V x Current A x 100 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 6 Table 7 4 Meters for Measurement of Main Circuit R DC link bus a3 Input primary side Output secondary side voltage P N E Voltage Current Voltage Current A Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter Ammeter Voltmeter Wattmeter DC voltmeter Ar As AT VR Vs VT Wr WT Au Av Aw Vu Vv Vw Wu Ww Vv Name of meter Moving iron Rectifier or Digital Digita Ac Digital AC Digital AC Moving coil moving iron AC power type type moter power meter power meter power meter type Type of meter Symbol of meter Note It is not recommended that meters other than a digital AC power meter be used for measuring the output voltage or output current since they may cause larger measurement errors or in the worst case they may be damaged
276. run the motor in the forward direction and opening them to stop it Short circuit terminals REV and CM to run the motor in the reverse direction and opening them to stop it 4 Frequency by voltage input is within the range from 0 to 10 VDC or 0 to the maximum frequency Frequency by current input is within the range from 4 to 20 mADC or 0 to the maximum frequency Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 8 8 8 4 External Dimensions 8 4 1 Standard models Nameplate y Power supply voltage Inverter type Dimensions mm D D1 D2 Three phase 200 V FRN0001C2S 20 FRN0002C2S 20 80 70 10 FRN0004C2S 20 95 25 FRNOOO6C2S 20 120 50 Single phase 200 V FRNOOO1C2S 70 FRNOOO2C2S 70 80 70 10 FRN0004C2S 70 95 25 FRNOOO6C2S 70 140 90 50 110 D ee E 4x5x7 22 oija m D2 elo Elongated hole 130 Power supply voltage Inverter type Dimensions mm D D1 D2 Three phase 400 V FRN0002C2S 40 115 75 40 FRN0004C2S 40 139 64 Note A box O in the above tables replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V series of inverters it replaces A or U Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 8
277. s are described below 1 The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage However for storage exceeding three months the ambient temperature should be within the range from 10 to 30 C This is to prevent the electrolytic capacitors in the inverter from deteriorating 2 The inverter must be stored in a package that is airtight to protect it from moisture Include a drying agent inside the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package to within 70 3 If the inverter has been installed in the equipment or control board at a construction site where it may be subjected to humidity dust or dirt then remove the inverter and store it in a suitable environment specified in Table 1 1 Precautions for storage over 1 year If the inverter will not be powered on for a long time the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate Power the inverters on once a year and keep them on for 30 to 60 minutes Do not connect the inverters to motors or run the motor Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 1 3 Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 2 1 Operating Environment Install the inverter in an environment that satisfies the requirements listed in Table 2 1 Table 2 1 Environmental Requirements Table 2 2 Output Current Derating Factor in Relation to Altitude Altitude derating factor 10
278. s of this AWARNING Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non flammable material A fire may result with other material 2 Clearances Ensure that the minimum clearances indicated in Figure 2 1 are maintained at all times When installing the inverter in the panel of your system take extra care with ventilation inside the panel as the temperature around the inverter tends to increase other dustproof containers Note 3 If you use the inverter in an altitude above 1000 m you should apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table 2 2 Top 100 mm Bottom 100 mm Figure 2 1 Mounting Direction and Required Clearances Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 1 When mounting two or more inverters When mounting two or more inverters in the same unit or panel basically lay them out side by side As long as the ambient temperature is 40 C or lower inverters can be mounted side by side without any clearance between them When mounting the inverters necessarily one above the other be sure to separate them with a partition plate or the like so that any heat radiating from an inverter will not affect the one s above 3 Mounting direction Secure the inverter to the mounting base with four screws or bolts M4 so that the FRENIC Mini logo faces outwards Tighten those screws or bolts perpendicular to the mounting base
279. s the output voltage to increase output torque of the motor note Since this function relies also on the characteristics of the motor set the base frequency 1 F04 the rated voltage at base frequency 1 F05 and other pertinent motor parameters P02 P0O3 and P06 through P99 in line with the motor capacity and characteristics or else perform auto tuning P04 When a special motor is driven or the load does not have sufficient rigidity the maximum torque might decrease or the motor operation might become unstable In such cases do not use auto torque boost but choose manual torque boost per F09 F37 0 or 1 E Auto energy saving operation This feature automatically controls the supply voltage to the motor to minimize the total power loss of motor and inverter Note that this feature may not be effective depending upon the motor or load characteristics Check the advantage of energy saving before actually apply this feature to your power system This feature applies to constant speed operation only During acceleration deceleration the inverter will run with manual torque boost F09 or auto torque boost depending on the F37 data If auto energy saving operation is enabled the response to a change in motor speed may be slow Do not use this feature for such a system that requires quick acceleration deceleration Use auto energy saving only where the base frequency is 60 Hz or lower If the base frequency is set at 60 Hz o
280. s to terminals 12 voltage and C1 current low pass filters can be enabled e Using the terminal command Hz2 Hz71 assigned to one of the digital input terminals switches between frequency command 1 F01 and frequency command 2 C30 Refer to function codes E01 to E03 F02 Operation Method F02 selects the source that specifies a run command for running the motor Data for F02 Run Command Source Description Keypad Enable the N 6 keys to run and stop the motor Rotation direction i Psat tes spite The rotation direction of the motor is specified by specified by terminal command terminal command FWD or REV External signals Enable terminal command FWD or REV to run and stop the motor Keypad Enable fen amp keys to run and stop the motor Note Forward rotation that this run command enables only the forward rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 22 Keypad Enable Furl Gros keys to run and stop the motor Note Reverse rotation that this run command enables only the reverse rotation There is no need to specify the rotation direction Cote When function code F02 0 or 1 the Run forward FWD and Run reverse REV terminal commands must be assigned to terminals FWD and REV respectively When the FWD or REV is ON the F02 data cannot be changed
281. selection 0 Follow H30 data Follow H30 data 1 Via RS 485 link Follow H30 data Loader 2 Follow H30 data Via RS 485 link Loader Loader 3 Via RS 485 link Via RS 485 link Loader Loader 1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 19 Table A Fuji Standard Motor Parameters Fuji s Nominal rated standard Nominal rated current of capacity of Applicable torque Fuji standard motor A Fuji standard Power motot boost motor kW supply rating Inverter type Function codes voltage kw Funcion F11 A07 E34 E37 Eu hetionic de F09 A05 Shipping destination version P02 A16 Asia China Europe USA 0 1 RN0001C2S 20 8 4 0 62 0 68 0 73 0 63 0 10 0 2 RN0002C2S 20 8 4 1 18 1 30 1 38 1 21 0 20 Three 0 4 RN0004C2S 20 BA 2 10 2 30 2 36 2 11 0 40 phase 0 75 RN0006C2S 20 6 8 3 29 3 60 3 58 3 27 0 75 200V 45 RN0010C2S 20 6 8 5 56 6 10 5 77 5 44 1 50 2 2 RN0012C2S 20 6 8 8 39 9 20 8 80 8 24 2 20 3 7 RN0020C2S 20 5 5 13 67 15 00 14 26 13 40 3 70 0 4 RN0002C2S 40 Fl 1 04 1 15 1 15 1 06 0 40 0 75 RN0004C2S 40 6 8 1 72 1 82 1 80 1 63 0 75 ae 1 5 RN0005C2S 40 6 8 3 10 3 20 3 10 2 76 1 50 400 V 2 2 RN0007C2S 40 6 8 4 54 4 72 4 60 4 12 2 20 aii RN0011C2S 40 55 743 770 750 670 3 70 0 1 RN0001C2S 70 8 4 0 62 0 68 0 73 0 63 0 10 0 2 RN0002C2S 70 8 4 1 18
282. set F11 to 0 00 Disable E Thermal time constant F12 F12 specifies the thermal time constant of the motor If the current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for the time specified by F12 the electronic thermal overload protection becomes activated to detect the motor overload The thermal time constant for general purpose motors including Fuji motors is approx 5 minutes by factory default Data setting range 0 5 to 75 0 minutes in increments of 0 1 minute Example When the F12 data is set at 5 0 5 minutes As shown below the electronic thermal overload protection is activated to detect an alarm u I condition alarm code 4 when the output current of 150 of the overload detection level specified by F11 flows for 5 minutes and 120 for approx 12 5 minutes The actual time required for issuing a motor overload alarm tends to be shorter than the specified value taking into account the time period from when the output current exceeds the allowable continuous drive current 100 until it reaches 150 of the overload detection level Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 30 Example of Thermal Overload Detection Characteristics 20 Specified with F12 Driving time af motor imin FIZ 5 ee eee ee i i JFIZ 0 8 4 50 100 150 200 Actual Output CurrentiCverloag Delection Level x 100 F
283. ssed by FRENIC Mini supports simultaneous keying as listed below For example the expression enor a keys stands for pressing the a key while holding down the fret key Table 3 2 Simultaneous Keying Operation mode Simultaneous keying Used to Running mode Control entry to exit from jogging operation frat keys Change certain function code data Age S Refer to function codes F00 H03 H45 and H97 in frat WY keys Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES Programming mode Switch to Programming mode without clearing ace a eae Alarm mode fre GE keys alarms er E About changing of function code data The function code data can be changed only when the data value displayed on the LED monitor is flashing When the data value is lit no change is allowed To change the data stop the inverter or disable the data protection 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes FRENIC Mini features the following three operation modes E Running mode This mode allows you to enter run stop commands in regular operation You can also monitor the running status in real time E Programming mode This mode allows you to configure function code data and check a variety of information relating to the inverter status and maintenance E Alarm mode If an alarm occurs the inverter automatically enters the Alarm mode In this mode you can view the corresponding alarm code and its related infor mation on the LED monitor
284. standard motor A39 Motor 2 Selection 0 Motor characteristics 0 Fuji standard IM N Y1 ACE 0 8 series Y2 UA 1 Motor characteristics 1 HP rating IM 3 Motor characteristics 3 Fuji standard IM 6 series 4 Other motors IM A41 Output Current 0 00 to 0 40 0 01 Y Y 0 20 Fluctuation Damping Gain for Motor 2 A51 Cumulative Run Time of 0 to 9999 in units of 10 hours N N Motor 2 A52 Startup Counter for Indication of cumulative startup count Y N Motor 2 0000 to FFFF in hex Note Alphabets in the Default setting field denote shipping destination A Asia C China E Europe and U USA Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 17 J codes Application Functions Incre Change Data Default Refer Code Name Data setting range ment Unit when Copying setin to running Pying g page J01 PID Control 0 Disable N Y 0 Mode selection 1 Enable Process control normal operation 2 Enable Process control inverse operation J02 Remote command SV 0 UP DOWN keys on keypad N Y 0 1 PID process command 1 Analog input terminals 12 and C1 3 Terminal command UP DOWN control 4 Command via communications link J03 P Gain 0 000 to 30 000 2 0 001 times Y Y 0 1
285. t 4 5 4 2 1 Jogging Operation This section provides the procedure for jogging the motor T Making the inverter ready to jog with the steps below The LED monitor should display i4 e Switch the inverter to Running mode see page 3 3 e Press the To A keys simultaneously The LED monitor displays the jogging frequency for approximately one second and then returns to 1424 again e Function codes C20 and H54 specify the jogging frequency and acceleration Tip deceleration time for jogging respectively These function codes are exclusive to jogging operation Configure them as needed Using the input terminal command JOG Ready for jogging switches between the normal operation state and ready to jog state Switching between the normal operation state and read to jog state with the gro N keys is possible only when the inverter is stopped Jogging the motor Hold down the furl key during which the motor continues jogging Releasing the key decelerates the motor to a stop Exiting the ready to jog state and returning to the normal operation state Press the for keys simultaneously Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 4 6 Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES 5 1 Function Code Tables Function codes enable the FRENIC Mini series of inverters to be set up to match your system requirements Each function code consists of a 3 letter alphanumeric string The first lette
286. t for Terminal C1 Filter time constant C33 and C38 configure a filter time constant for an analog voltage and current input on terminals 12 and C1 respectively The larger the time constant the slower the response Specify the proper filter time constant taking into account the response speed of the machine load If the input voltage fluctuates due to line noise remove the cause of the noise or take an electric circuit related measure Only when no effect is obtained increase the time constant Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 60 P02 Motor 1 Rated capacity P02 specifies the rated capacity of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor Data for P02 Unit Remarks kW Whi 0 01 to 30 00 en P99 0 3 4 20 or 21 HP When P99 1 P03 Motor 1 Rated current PO3 specifies the rated current of the motor Enter the rated value given on the nameplate of the motor P04 Motor 1 Auto tuning The inverter automatically detects the motor parameters and saves them in its internal memory Basically it is not necessary to perform tuning when using a Fuji standard motor with a standard connection with the inverter In any of the following cases perform auto tuning since the motor parameters are different from those of Fuji standard motors so as not to obtain the best performance under each of t
287. t indicates the status of the inverter when the alarm condition occurred Figure 3 10 shows the status transition of the alarm information and Table 3 16 lists the details of the alarm information Power ON Running s mode viens Programming mode List of alarm codes Running status info at the time an alarm occurred Laie decimal arene oy ao Item No Switches at approx Qulput frequency eee oe Ta aa 15ecand intervals 4 van 50g fa y et a T tem Mo Swiiahes at approx Output current es i second interyvais 50 a JSE wf htemNc Swatches al approx Running status 3 1 sucarnd inbervals boy a r ira ro STREN Ea Same as above e cats eir A Ear 2 ss Same as above 5 Blas hoe F TOOU a Same as above Figure 3 10 Alarm Information Status Transition Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 3 26 Basic key operation Before viewing alarm information set function code E52 to 2 Full menu mode 1 When the inverter is powered on it automatically enters Running mode In that mode press the ee key to switch to Programming mode The function selection menu appears 2 With the menu displayed use the wz and Mw keys to select Alarm information 4 4 3 Press the key to display the alarm list code e g In the list of alarm codes the alarm information
288. t terminal exists 1 XF XR and RST are assigned for communication Refer to Displaying control I O signal terminals under communication control on the next page 2 Terminal CM if the jumper switch is set for SINK terminal PLC if the jumper switch is set for SOURCE m Displaying I O signal status in hexadecimal format Each I O terminal is assigned to bit 15 through bit 0 as shown in Table 3 14 An unassigned bit is interpreted as 0 Allocated bit data is displayed on the LED monitor in 4 hexadecimal digits 7 to each With the FRENIC Mini digital input terminals FWD and REV are assigned to bit 0 and bit 1 respectively Terminals X1 through X3 are assigned to bits 2 through 4 The bit is set to 1 when the corresponding input terminal is short circuited with terminal CM or terminal PLC and is set to 0 when it is open For example when FWD and X1 are on short circuited and all the others are off open 27 5 is displayed on LED4 to LED1 Terminal CM if the jumper switch is set for SINK terminal PLC if the jumper switch is set for SOURCE Digital output terminal Y1 is assigned to bit 0 Bit 0 is set to 1 when this terminal is short circuited with Y1E and to 0 when it is open The status of the relay contact output terminal 30ABC is assigned to bit 8 It is set to 1 when the circuit between output terminals 30A and 30C is closed and to 0 when the circuit between 30B an
289. ta alarm history and relevant information of those alarms that could occur in running the inverter the inverter saves mock alarm data enabling you to confirm the mock alarm status To clear the mock alarm data use H97 Accessing the H97 data requires simultaneous keying of S key A key H97 data automatically reverts to 0 after clearing the alarm data H69 Automatic Deceleration Anti regenerative control Mode selection H76 Automatic Deceleration Frequency increment limit for braking H69 specifies the anti regenerative control In inverters not equipped with a PWM converter or braking resistor if regenerative energy returned exceeds the inverter s braking capability an overvoltage trip occurs When H69 1 The anti regenerative control is functionally equivalent to that of the original FRENIC Mini series FRN c10 00 That is when the DC link bus voltage exceeds the preset voltage limiting level the inverter lengthens the deceleration time to three times the specified time to decrease the deceleration torque to 1 3 In this way the inverter reduces the regenerative energy tentatively This control applies only in deceleration When the load on the motor results in a braking effect the control does not have any effect When H69 2 or 4 The inverter controls the output frequency to keep the braking torque at around 0 N m in both acceleration deceleration and constant speed running phases in order to avoid an overvolta
290. ter describes inverter operation using the keypad The inverter features three operation modes Running Programming and Alarm modes which enable you to run and stop the motor monitor running status set function code data display running information required for maintenance and display alarm data Chapter 4 OPERATION This chapter describes preparation to be made before running the motor for a test and practical operation Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES This chapter provides a list of the function codes Function codes to be used often and irregular ones are described individually Chapter 6 TROUBLESHOOTING This chapter describes troubleshooting procedures to be followed when the inverter malfunctions or detects an alarm condition In this chapter first check whether any alarm code is displayed or not and then proceed to the troubleshooting items Chapter 7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION This chapter describes inspection measurement and insulation test which are required for safe inverter operation It also provides information about periodical replacement parts and guarantee of the product Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS This chapter lists specifications including output ratings control system external dimensions and protective functions Chapter 9 LIST OF PERIPHERAL EQUIPMENT AND OPTIONS This chapter describes main peripheral equipment and options which can be connected to the FRENIC Mini series of inverters Chapter 10 APPLICA
291. ter is powered OFF To avoid causing system malfunctions by this interlock these signals to keep them ON using an external power supply Furthermore the validity of these output signals is not guaranteed for approximately 1 5 seconds after power on so introduce such a mechanism that masks them during the transient period e Terminals 30A B C use mechanical contacts that cannot stand frequent ON OFF switching Where frequent ON OFF switching is anticipated for example limiting a current by using signals subjected to inverter output limit control such as switching to commercial power line use transistor output Y1 instead The service life of a relay is approximately 200 000 times if it is switched ON and OFF at one second intervals Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 52 The table below lists functions that can be assigned to terminals Y1 and 30A B C To make the explanations simpler the examples shown below are all written for the normal logic Active ON Function code data Active ON Active OFF 1000 Inverter running 1001 Frequency arrival signal 1002 Frequency detected 1003 Undervoltage detected Inverter stopped 1005 Inverter output limiting 1006 Auto restarting after momentary power failure 1007 Motor overload early warning 1026 Auto resetting 1030 Service lifetime alarm 1035 Inverter running 2 1036 Overload prevention control 1037 Current detected 1038
292. terminal command is used to jog or inch the motor for positioning a work piece Turning this command ON makes the inverter ready for jogging Simultaneous keying es N keys on the keypad is functionally equivalent to this command however it is restricted by the run command source as listed below When the run command source is the keypad F02 0 2 or 3 Input terminal command JOG E N keys on the keypad Inverter running state GE Ready for jogging Pressing these keys toggles between Normal operation the normal operation and ready for jogging Ready for jogging When the run command source is digital input F02 1 Input terminal command JOG for N keys on the keypad Inverter running state Ready for jogging Disable Normal operation Jogging operation Pressing the FuN key or turning the FWD or REV terminal command ON starts jogging For the jogging by the keypad the inverter jogs only when the RN key is held down Releasing the fn key decelerates to stop During jogging the frequency specified by C20 Jogging Frequency and the acceleration deceleration time specified by H54 ACC DEC Time apply note e The inverters status transition between ready for jogging and normal operation is possible only when the inverter is stopped To start jogging operation by simultaneously entering the JOG terminal command and arun command e g FWD the input delay time between the two
293. tern torque boost type and auto energy saving operation for optimizing the operation in accordance with the characteristics of the load F09 specifies the type of torque boost in order to provide sufficient starting torque Data for Torque boost Auto energy F37 v f pattern F09 saving Variable Torque boost torque V f specified by pattern F09 Linear Disable Constant torque load V f pattern Auto torque Constant torque load boost To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Variable torque load General purpose fans and pumps Applicable load Variable torque load General purpose fans and pumps Variable Torque boost torque V f specified by pattern F09 Linear Enable V f pattern Auto torque Constant torque load boost To be selected if a motor may be over excited at no load Constant torque load Note If a required load torque acceleration toque is more than 50 of the rated torque it is recommended to select the linear V f pattern factory default E V f characteristics The FRENIC Mini series of inverters offers a variety of V f patterns and torque boosts which include V f patterns suitable for variable torque load such as general fans and pumps or for special pump load requiring high starting torque Two types of torque boost are available manual and automatic Output voltage v 100 Rated voltage Torque Output boost requency Base he
294. tion net Table of Contents Preface m Safety precautions Conformity to the Low Voltage Directive in the EU ix m Precautions for use i How this manual is organized Chapter 1 BEFORE USING THE INVERTER 1 1 1 1 Acceptance Inspection 1 2 External Views 1 3 Transportation 1 4 Storage Environment 1 4 1 Temporary storage 1 4 2 Long term storage Chapter 2 MOUNTING AND WIRING OF THE INVERTER 3 2 1 Operating Environment 2 2 Installing the Inverter m 2 3 Wiring a 2 3 1 Removing and mounting the termina blOCk COVAS in iadi 2 2 Terminal arrangement and screw specifications Recommended wire sizes m Wiring precautions cece Wiring for main circuit terminals and grounding terminals cceeeee 2 7 Wiring for control circuit terminals 2 11 Setting up the jumper switches 2 18 Cautions relating to harmonic component noise and leakage CUITEM ENS SANEA NE N S 2 20 2 3 2 2 3 3 2 3 4 2 3 5 2 3 6 2 3 7 2 3 8 Chapter 3 OPERATION USING THE KEYPAD 3 1 3 1 Names and Functions of Keypad COMPOMENMS csessecessessevsssceseresessisedoasocets 3 1 3 2 Overview of Operation Modes 3 3 Running mode 5 Monitoring the running status 3 4 3 3 1 3 3 2 Setting up reference frequency and PID process command 0 00 3 5 3 3 3 Running stopping the motor 3 4 Programming mode 3 4 1 Setting up the function codes
295. tives devices If an overvoltage trip occurs while the inverter is stopped or operated under a light load it is assumed that the surge Measures against current is generated by open close of the phase advancing surge currents capacitor in the power system Connect a DC reactor to the inverter When checking the insulation resistance of the inverter use a Megger test 500 V Megger and follow the instructions contained in Chapter 7 Section 7 5 Insulation Test AAE When using remote control limit the wiring length between Control circuit the i t d tor box to 20 l d twisted wiring length e inverter and operator box to 20 m or less and use twiste pair or shielded cable If long wiring is used between the inverter and the motor the Re inverter will overheat or trip as a result of overcurrent Wiring length i AS A between inverter high frequency current flowing into the stray capacitance in and motor the wires connected to the phases Ensure that the wiring is Wiring shorter than 50 m If this length must be exceeded lower the carrier frequency or mount an output circuit filter OFL eh Select wires with a sufficient capacity by referring to the Wing Size current value or recommended wire size Wiring type Do not use one multicore cable in order to connect several 9 typ inverters with motors Grounding Securely ground the inverter using the grounding terminal Select an inverter according to the nominal applied motor Driving gen listed in
296. to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 Jogging operation H61 UP DOWN Control 0 0 00 N Y 1 Initial frequency setting 1 Last UP DOWN command value on releasing a run command H63 Low Limiter 0 Limit by F16 Frequency limiter Low Y Y 0 5 35 Mode selection and continue to run 1 If the output frequency lowers below the one limited by F16 Frequency limiter Low decelerate to stop the motor H64 Lower limiting 0 0 Depends on F16 Frequency limiter 0 1 Hz Y Y 2 0 frequency Low 0 1 to 60 0 H69 Automatic Deceleration 0 Disable Y Y 0 5 74 Anti regenerative 1 Enable Lengthen the deceleration time control to three times the specified time under voltage limiting control Compatible with the original FRENIC Mini series FRNO00OC10 00 Mode selection 2 Enable Torque limit control Cancel the anti regenerative control if the actual deceleration time exceeds three times the specified one 4 Enable Torque limit control Disable force to stop processing H70 Overload Prevention 0 00 Follow deceleration time specified by 0 01 Hz s Y h A 999 5 75 Control FO8 E11 0 01 to 100 0 999 Cancel H71 Deceleration 0 Disable Y ha 0 Characteristics 1 Enable H76 Automatic Deceleration 0 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz Y W 5 0 5 74 Frequency increment limit for braking H78 Maintenance Interval 1 0 Disable 1 Y N 8760 1 to 9999 in units of 10 hours H79 Preset Startup Count for 0000 Disable
297. ton Output frequency before slip conn compensation Hz a Output frequency after slip conn compensation Hz iliti Frequency actually being output Pre slip compensation frequency Reference frequency Hz SOG Final reference frequency WWI Load shaft speed r min LILI Output frequency Hz x E50 Line speed m min TG Output frequency Hz x E50 Constant feeding rate time on ESG min a Outpul frequency x E34 Output current A LEGAL Current output from the inverter in RMS Input power kW OSI Input power to the inverter UHH 1 Output voltage V Note 2 CLL Voltage output from the inverter in RMS PID command PID feedback amount trans formed to the virtual physical value of the object to be controlled PID command Note 3 Note 4 TATE PID feedback amount nn Note 3 Note 5 mee Refer to function codes E40 and E41 PID output in assuming the maximum fre quency F03 as 100 Timer sec Note 3 Sul Remaining effective timer count Input watthour kVvinh OC PID output Note 3 Note 4 HHA Input watt hour a Display value p Note 1 A value 10000 or above cannot be displayed on the 4 digit LED monitor screen so 3 appears instead II Note 2 When the LED monitor displays an output voltage the 7 segment letter in the lowest digit stands for the unit of the voltage V Note 3 These PID related items appear only under PID contr
298. tor A A Hz PO2 A16 kW PO3 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 09 0 06 0 21 0 19 11 45 9 75 1 77 0 10 to 0 19 0 10 0 32 0 26 10 30 10 07 1 77 0 20 to 0 39 0 20 0 61 0 51 10 57 10 54 2 33 0 40 to 0 74 0 4 1 06 0 80 8 18 10 95 2 40 0 75 to 1 49 0 75 1 63 1 10 6 83 8 47 2 33 1 50 to 2 19 15 2 76 1 45 5 07 8 68 2 00 2 20 to 3 69 2 2 4 12 2 33 5 05 8 54 1 80 3 70 to 5 49 3 7 6 70 3 68 4 50 8 74 1 93 5 50 to 7 49 55 10 24 5 27 4 09 11 08 1 40 7 50 to 10 99 75 12 86 5 99 3 47 11 32 1 57 11 00 to 14 99 11 18 60 8 48 2 91 11 62 1 07 15 00 to 18 49 15 24 25 9 58 2 49 12 55 1 13 18 50 to 21 99 18 5 29 88 10 25 2 23 12 67 0 87 22 00 to 29 99 22 34 29 12 08 2 06 12 23 0 90 30 00 30 47 61 18 69 2 02 11 47 0 80 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 68 m When HP rating IM P99 1 or A39 1 is selected the motor parameters are as listed in the following tables HP refers to horse power that is used mainly in North America as a unit of motor capacity 200 V class series for all destinations 230V 60 Hz rated voltage base frequency i Nominal Rated No load a z Rated slip ne applied current current A he frequency motor A A Hz PO2 A16 kW PO3 A17 PO6 A20 PO7 A21 PO8 A22 P12 A26 0 01 to 0 11 0 10 0 44 0 40 13 79 11 75 2 50 0 12 to 0 24 0 12 0 68 0 55 12 96 12 67 2 50
299. tting page y01 RS 485 Communication 1 Station address 1 to 255 1 N Y yo2 Communications error 0 Immediately trip with alarm 4 Y Y 0 processing 4 Trip with alarm after running for the period specified by timer y03 2 Retry during the period specified by timer y03 If the retry fails trip with alarm amp If it succeeds continue to run 3 Continue to run y03 Timer 0 0 to 60 0 0 1 s Y Y 2 0 y04 Baud rate 0 2400 bps Y Y 3 1 4800 bps 2 9600 bps 3 19200 bps 4 38400 bps y05 Data length 0 8 bits Y Y 0 1 7 bits y06 Parity check 0 None 2 stop bits for Modbus RTU Y Y 0 1 Even parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 2 Odd parity 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU 3 None 1 stop bit for Modbus RTU y07 Stop bits 0 2 bits Y w 0 1 1bit y08 No response error 0 No detection 1 s Y Y 0 detection time 1 to 60 y09 Response interval 0 00 to 1 00 0 01 s y Y 0 01 y10 Protocol selection 0 Modbus RTU protocol Y Y 1 1 SX protocol FRENIC Loader protocol 2 Fuji general purpose inverter protocol y97 Communication Data 0 Save into nonvolatile storage Rewritable Y Y 0 Storage Selection 1 times limited 1 Write into temporary storage Rewritable times unlimited 2 Save all data from temporary storage to nonvolatile one After saving data the y97 data automatically reverts to 1 y99 Loader Link Function Frequency command Run command Y N 0 Mode
300. ty vibration and atmosphere measure using specification must dust gas oil mist or water drops apparatus be satisfied 2 Check that tools or other foreign materials or dangerous objects are 2 Visual inspection 2 No foreign or not left around the equipment dangerous objects are left Voltage Check that the input voltages of the Measure the voltages The standard main and control circuit are correct using a multimeter or specifications must the like be satisfied Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 7 1 Check part Table 7 1 List of Periodic Inspections Continued Check item 1 Check that the display is clear 2 Check that there is no missing part in the displayed characters How to inspect 1 2 Visual inspection Evaluation criteria 1 2 The display can be read and there is no fault Structure such as frames and covers Check for 1 Abnormal noise or excessive vibration 2 Loose bolts at clamp sections 3 Deformation or breakage 4 Discoloration caused by overheat 5 Contamination or accumulation of dust or dirt 1 Visual or auditory inspection 2 Retighten 3 4 5 Visual inspection 1 2 3 4 5 No abnormalities Common 1 Check that bolts and screws are tight and not missing 2 Check the devices and insulators for deformation cracks breakage and discoloration caus
301. ty and allowable average loss respectively Since those values differ depending on the specifications of the braking resistor refer to the tables given below or calculate them according to the expressions given in the FRENIC Mini User s Manual 24A7 E 0023 Chapter 9 FUNCTION CODES Note Depending on the thermal marginal characteristics of the braking resistor the electronic thermal overload protection feature may act so that the inverter issues the overheat protection alarm si even if the actual temperature rise is not enough If it happens review the relationship between the performance index of the braking resistor and settings of related function codes The tables below list the discharging capability and allowable average loss of the braking resistor These values depend upon the inverter and braking resistor models E External Braking Resistors Standard models The thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor acts as a thermal protector of the motor for overheat so assign an Enable external alarm trip terminal command THR to any of digital input terminals X1 to X3 FWD and REV and connect that terminal and its common terminal to braking resistor s terminals 2 and 1 To protect the motor from overheat without using the thermal sensor relay mounted on the braking resistor configure the electronic the
302. ue for ON between X1 and CM is 1 in the normal logic system for example OFF is 1 in the negative logic system and vice versa Run 4 The negative logic signaling cannot be applicable to FWD and REV reverse ee dy ae command Digital input circuit specifications Run forward command Cenir erea tA NDG Operation ON level voltage SINK OFF level Operation ON level voltage SOURCE OFF level ute Operation current at ON Xa X3 Input Voltage at 0 V FDL REV l Allowable leakage Icm current at OFF 5 Q T 2 2 a Phalecoupler PLC Connects to PLC output signal power supply signal Rated voltage 24 VDC Allowable range 22 to 27 VDC Max 50 mA power Digital Common terminal for digital input signals common This terminal is electrically isolated from terminals 11 and Y1E Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 2 14 Table 2 8 Symbols Names and Functions of the Control Circuit Terminals Continued Functions m Using a relay contact to turn X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV ON or OFF Figure 2 7 shows two examples of a circuit that uses a relay contact to turn control signal input X1 X2 X3 FWD or REV ON or OFF Circuit a has a connecting jumper applied to SINK whereas circuit b has one that is applied to SOURCE N
303. unction codes for making the inverter functions match your needs To set function codes in Menu 1 Data setting it is necessary to set function code E52 data to 0 Function code data editing mode or 2 Full menu mode The table below lists the function codes available in the FRENIC Mini The function codes are displayed on the LED monitor on the keypad as shown below Cc PNG f Lii ID number in each function code group Function code group Table 3 7 List of FRENIC Mini Function Codes Function code group F codes FOO to F51 Fundamental functions To be used for basic motor running Function code Function Description E codes E01 to E99 Extension terminal To be used to select the functions of the functions control circuit terminals To be used to set functions related to the LED monitor display C codes Control functions of To be used to set application functions frequency related to frequency settings P codes Motor 1 parameters To be used to set special parameters for the motor capacity etc H codes High performance To be used for high added value func functions tions and complicated control etc A codes Motor 2 parameters To be used to set specific parameters for the motor capacity etc J codes Application functions To be used for PID control and brake signals y codes Link functions To be used for communications Q Refer to Chapter 5 FUNCTION CODES for detai
304. unt Y N 1 0000 to FFFF in hex H45 Mock Alarm 0 Disable Y N 0 5 74 1 Enable Once a mock alarm occurs the data automatically returns to 0 H47 Initial Capacitance of DC Indication for replacement of DC link bus 1 Y N Link Bus Capacitor capacitor 0000 to FFFF in hex H48 Cumulative Run Time of Indication for replacement of capacitors on 1 10h Y N Capacitors on Printed printed circuit boards Circuit Boards 0 to 9999 in units of 10 hours 1 Available in the ROM version 0500 or later Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 13 H codes continued Change Refer Incre Data Default Code Name Data setting range ment Unit when copying setting to l running page H50 Non linear V f Pattern 1 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y 0 0 5 23 Frequency H51 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage 1 Vv N Y2 ACE 0 for 200 V class series U 230 460 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H52 Non linear V f Pattern 2 0 0 Cancel 0 1 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y 0 0 Frequency H53 Voltage 0 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage 1 Vv N Y2 0 for 200 V class series 0 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series H54 ACC DEC Time 0 00
305. uppressing Harmonics in Home Electric and General purpose Appliances established in September 1994 and revised in October 1999 pub lished by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry currently the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry METI Since the revision of the guideline in January 2004 however these inverters have no longer been subject to the guideline The individual inverter manufacturers have voluntarily employed harmonics suppression measures As our measure it is recommended that DC reactors DCRs authorized in this manual be con nected to the FRENIC Mini series of inverters When using DCRs not authorized in this manual however consult your Fuji Electric representative for the detailed specifications Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics by Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High Voltage Refer to the FRENIC Mini User s Manual 24A7 E 0023 Appendix C for details on this guideline Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net m Safety precautions Read this manual thoroughly before proceeding with installation connections wiring operation or maintenance and inspection Ensure you have sound knowledge of the device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions before proceeding to operate the inverter Safety precautions are classified into the following two categories in this manual Failure to h
306. urrent gt Reduce the load e g Use the overload early warning E34 to reduce the load before the overload protection is activated In winter the load tends to increase gt Lower the temperature around the motor gt Increase the motor sound Carrier frequency F26 4 The activation level H27 of the PTC thermistor for motor overheat protection was set inadequately Check the thermistor specifications and recalculate the detection voltage gt Modify the data of function code H27 Connections and resistance values of the PTC thermistor and pull up resistor are not appropriate G Check the connections and the resistance value gt Correct the connections and replace the resistor with the one having an appropriate resistance Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 6 15 Possible Causes What to Check and Suggested Measures 6 Excessive torque boost Check whether decreasing the torque boost F09 A05 does not specified F09 A05 stall the motor gt If no stall occurs decrease the torque boost F09 A05 7 The V f pattern did not Check if the base frequency F04 A02 and the rated voltage at match the motor base frequency F05 A03 match the values on the motor s nameplate Match the function code data to the values on the motor s nameplate 8 Incorrect setting of Although no PTC thermistor is used the ther
307. us capacitors can not be measured Follow the procedure mentioned below when you measure the capacitance of the DC link bus capacitors under the ordinary operating condition at the end user s installation momen cans cnn c ncn cc cc nce Procedure for setting up measurement condition 1 Set function code H98 Protection maintenance function to enable the user to specify the judgment criteria for the service life of the DC link bus capacitor Bit 3 refer to function code H98 2 Place the inverter in stopped state 3 Place the inverter in the state of power off under ordinary operating conditions 4 Set both function codes H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor to 0000 5 Switch OFF the inverter Measure the discharging time of the DC link bus capacitor and save the result in function code H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor The condition under which the measurement has been conducted will be automatically collected and saved During the measurement appears on the LED monitor 6 Switch ON the inverter again Confirm that H42 Capacitance of DC link bus capacitor and H47 Initial capacitance of DC link bus capacitor hold right values Move to Menu 5 Maintenance Information and confirm that the relative capacitance ratio to full capacitance is 100 Note If the measurement has failed 0001 is entered into both
308. utput from the inverter Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 9 4 Chapter 10 APPLICATION OF DC REACTORS DCRs Since the Japanese Guideline for Suppressing Harmonics in Home and General purpose Appliances issued by the Ministry of International Trade and Industry Currently the Ministry of Economy Trade and Industry was revised in January 2004 the general purpose inverters have no longer been subject to the guideline Individual inverter manufacturers have voluntarily employed harmonics suppression measures It is recommended that DC reactors DCRs specified in Table 10 1 be connected to the FRENIC Mini series of inverters Table 10 1 List of DC Reactors DCRs a Nominal an Applicable inverter type DCR type 0 1 FRNOOO1C2S 20 EROS 0 2 FRN0002C2S 20 Three 0 4 FRN0004C2S 20 DCR2 0 4 prase 0 75 FRN0006C2S 20 DCR2 0 75 1 5 FRNOO10C2S 20 DCR2 1 5 2 2 FRN0012C2S 20 DCR2 2 2 3 7 FRNOO20C2S 20 DCR2 3 7 0 1 FRNOOO1C2S 70 DCR2 0 2 See 0 2 FRN0002C2S 70 DCR2 0 4 phase 0 4 FRNOOO4C28 70 DCR2 0 75 200 V 0 75 FRNOOO6C2S 70 DCR2 1 5 1 5 FRN0010C2S 70 DCR2 2 2 2 2 FRNO012C2S 70 DCR2 3 7 Note A box O in the above table replaces A C E or U depending on the shipping destination For three phase 200 V class series of inverters it replaces A or U LUR LI Las u Figure 10 1 Connection Diagram of DC Reactor DCR
309. vel Note that even when power is restored restart will not take place until the restart time H13 has elapsed Factory default By factory default H13 is set at one of the values shown below according to the inverter capacity Basically you do not need to change H13 data However if the long restart time causes the flow rate of the pump to overly decrease or causes any other problem you might as well reduce the setting to about a half of the default value In such a case make sure that no alarm occurs Inverter capacity kW Factory default of H13 Restart time in seconds 0 1 to 7 5 0 5 11 to 15 1 0 Phone 800 894 0412 Fax 888 723 4773 Web www ctiautomation net Email info ctiautomation net 5 34 E Restart mode after momentary power failure Frequency fall rate H14 During restart after a momentary power failure if the inverter output frequency and the idling motor speed cannot be harmonized with each other an overcurrent will flow activating the overcurrent limiter If it happens the inverter reduces the output frequency to match the idling motor speed according to the reduction rate Frequency fall rate Hz s specified by H14 Data for H14 Inverter s action for the output frequency fall 0 00 Follow the selected deceleration time 0 01 to 100 00 Hz s Follow data specified by H14 Follow the setting of the PI processor in the current limiter aye The PI constant is prefixed inside the inverter
310. wise injuries could occur e The inverter motor and wiring generate electric noise Take care of malfunction of the nearby sensors and devices To prevent the motor from malfunctioning implement noise control measures Otherwise an accident could occur Operation WARNINGA e Be sure to install the terminal block cover before turning the power on Do not remove the cover while power is applied Otherwise electric shock could occur Do not operate switches with wet hands Doing so could cause electric shock If the retry function has been selected the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending on the cause of tripping Design the machinery or equipment so that human safety is ensured after restarting e If the stall prevention function current limiter automatic deceleration and overload prevention control have been selected the inverter may operate at an accelera tion deceleration time or frequency different from the set ones Design the machine so that safety is ensured even in such cases Otherwise an accident could occur The STOP key is only effective when function setting Function code F02 has been es tablished to enable the STOP key Prepare an emergency stop switch separately If you disable the STOP key priority function and enable operation by external commands you cannot emergency stop the inverter using the STOP key on the built in keypad If an ala
311. y kVA 2 0 30 0 57 1 3 2 0 3 5 4 5 Rated voltage V 3 Three phase 200 to 240 V with AVR function Rated current A 4 0 8 0 7 1 5 1 4 3 5 2 5 55 4 2 9 2 7 0 12 0 10 0 Output Ratings Overload capability 150 of rated output current for 1 min or 200 of rated output current for0 5s Rated frequency Hz 50 60 Hz Phases voltage frequency Single phase 200 to 2 40 V 50 60 Hz Voltage and frequency variations Voltage 10 to 15 Frequency 5 to 5 2 D lt 5 a 3 Q w Rated DCR 2 0 3 5 6 4 current A 6 w o DCR 3 3 5 4 9 7 Required power supply capacity kVA 7 0 4 0 7 1 3 2 4 Torque 8 150 100 50 DC braking Braking starting freque Braking time 0 0 to 30 ncy 9 0 0 to 60 0 Hz 0 s Braking level 0 to 100 Braking transistor Bui t in Applicable safety standards UL508C IEC 61800 5 1 2007 under application Encl losure IP20 IEC 60529 1989 UL open type UL50 Cooling method Natural cooling Fan cooling Mass kg 1 Fuj 2 Rel i 4 pole standard motors ers 3 Output voltages cannot exceed the power supply voltage 4 The loa the 6 Re the 7 Rel 8 Rel carrier ers ers ers AVI 9 Availab Note A box R contro
312. y 1 25 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y ACU 60 0 5 23 E 50 0 F04 Base Frequency 1 25 0 to 400 0 0 1 Hz N Y AU 60 0 ICE 50 0 F05 Rated Voltage at Base 0 Output a voltage in proportion to input 1 Vv N Y2 ACE 0 Frequency 1 voltage U 230 460 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 200 V class series 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled voltage for 400 V class series FO6 Maximum Output 80 to 240 Output an AVR controlled 1 v N Y2 A 220 Voltage 1 voltage for 200 V class series 380 160 to 500 Output an AVR controlled E voltage for 400 V class series E 230 400 U 230 460 F07 Acceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y w 6 00 5 25 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the acceleration time requiring external soft start F08 Deceleration Time 1 0 00 to 3600 0 01 s Y Y 6 00 Note Entering 0 00 cancels the deceleration time requiring external soft start F09 Torque Boost 1 0 0 to 20 0 0 1 Y Y ACE 5 26 percentage with respect to F05 Rated See Voltage at Base Frequency 1 Table Note This setting takes effect when F37 0 A 1 3 or 4 U 0 0 F10 Electronic Thermal 1 For a general purpose motor and Fuji Y Y 1 5 28 Overload Protection for standard permanent magnet Motor 1 synchronous motor with shaft driven Motor characteristics cooling fan 2 For an inverter driven motor with separately powered cooling fan F11 Overload detection 0 00 Disable 0 01 to 100 0 0 01 A Y Y1 See level 1 to 13

Fuji Frenic Mini Compact Drives Instruction

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents